        Title Page --------------------------------------- Page 1 of 202
        
        $$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
        $$                            GUF                             $$
        $$            Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer             $$
        $$                         Version 1c                         $$
        $$                        16 July 1998                        $$
        $$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$$
            _    _                 __  __                         _
           | |  | |               |  \/  |                       | |
           | |  | |___  ___ _ __  | \  / | __ _ _ __  _   _  __ _| |
           | |  | / __|/ _ \ '__| | |\/| |/ _` | '_ \| | | |/ _` | |
           | |__| \__ \  __/ |    | |  | | (_| | | | | |_| | (_| | |
            \____/|___/\___|_|    |_|  |_|\__,_|_| |_|\__,_|\__,_|_|
        
        ################################################################
        ##                    This User Manual Is                     ##
        ##               (C) 1998 Red Flower Computers                ##
        ##                     All Right Reserved                     ##
        ################################################################
        
        ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
        ??                      THIS USER MANUAL...                   ??
        ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????
        ??                                                            ??
        ??  ...can be; viewed ON-SCREEN (using a Text Editor or       ??
        ??  ASCII Text File Viewer), or; PRINTED out on paper.        ??
        ??                                                            ??
        ??  Printed out, it's 202 x A4 (or 11" tractor feed) pages    ??
        ??  long (including this title page).                         ??
        ??                                                            ??
        ??  To PRINT it, from the MS-DOS prompt, type:-               ??
        ??       TYPE MANUAL.TXT > PRN <Enter>                        ??
        ??                                                            ??
        ??  The User Manual is easier to read when printed out.  But  ??
        ??  that takes time and paper.  SO, I'VE DESIGNED IT TO BE    ??
        ??  AS EASY TO READ AS POSSIBLE, WITH A TEXT EDITOR OR ASCII  ??
        ??  TEXT FILE VIEWER.  In particular, there are no great      ??
        ??  blodges of white space (multiple blank lines).            ??
        ??                                                            ??
        ??  In addition, there is a Table of Contents immediately     ??
        ??  following this Title Page - and a header of the form:-    ??
        ??      Chapter 1: Introduction ----------- Page 3 of 202     ??
        ??      Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ----------- Page 5 of 202     ??
        ??      ...                                                   ??
        ??  at the top of every page thereafter.                      ??
        ??                                                            ??
        ??  So, to locate any page (referred to in the Table of       ??
        ??  Contents) - get your text editor or file viewer to        ??
        ??  search for:-                                              ??
        ??      "Page #"                                              ??
        ??  When it finds that text, you'll be at the TOP of the      ??
        ??  desired page.                                             ??
        ??                                                            ??
        ????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????????

        Table of Contents -------------------------------- Page 2 of 202
        
        ################################################################
        ##                     TABLE OF CONTENTS                      ##
        ################################################################
        
        TITLE PAGE.....................................................1
        
        TABLE OF CONTENTS..............................................2
        
        CHAPTER 1:  INTRODUCTION.......................................8
                What Does "GUF" Do?....................................8
                Searching For Graphic Files............................8
                Viewing Graphic Files..................................8
                Which (Graphic) File Formats Does "GUF" Support?.......8
                Searching For Other Graphic File Formats...............9
                Hardware Requirements..................................9
                Software Requirements.................................10
                Registration..........................................10
        
        CHAPTER 2:  A QUICK TOUR......................................11
                "Levels"..............................................11
                "Shorts" & "Longs"....................................11
                The "Drives" Level....................................12
                The "Wanted Files" Level..............................13
                The "Directorys" Level................................15
                The "Files (Stats Only)" Level........................16
                The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level..................17
                The "Full-Screen (Shorts)" Level......................18
                The "Full-Screen (Originals)" Level...................19
        
        CHAPTER 3:  QUICK START INSTRUCTIONS..........................20
                Installation..........................................20
                Starting GUF - From MS-DOS............................21
                Starting GUF - From Windows 95........................22
                Using GUF - Once You'Ve Started It....................23
                Quitting GUF..........................................23
        
        CHAPTER 4:  INSTALLING GUF....................................24
                Installation Summary..................................24
                The Files.............................................25
                The GUF Shareware Distribution Archive................26
                Disk Space Requirements...............................27
                Getting To The MS-DOS Prompt..........................28
                Creating The GUF Directory............................29
                Un-Zipping The Archive File...........................30
                Making GUF Easier To Start - From Windows 95..........30
                Making GUF Easier To Start - From The MS-DOS Prompt...31
                Starting GUF - By Entering It's Full Pathname.........32
                Starting GUF - With "GUF <Enter>".....................32
                How Does MS-DOS Find GUF?.............................32
                Setting-Up MS-DOS - To Start GUF With "GUF <Enter>"...33
                What Is The "Search Path"?............................33
                Finding Out What Your Search Path Is..................34
                Displaying The Current (Memory-Resident) Search Path..35
                Displaying The Search Path Defined In "AUTOEXEC.BAT"..35

        Table of Contents -------------------------------- Page 3 of 202
        
        CHAPTER 4:  INSTALLING GUF cont'd
                Selecting A Directory For "GUF.BAT"
                From Your Search Path.................................36
                Method 1 - Adding The GUF Directory
                           To Your Search Path........................37
                Method 2 - Installing The Supplied "GUF.BAT" File.....38
                Creating A New "GUF.BAT" File.........................39
        
        CHAPTER 5:  STARTING GUF......................................40
                Starting GUF - From The (MS-DOS Or Windows)
                               MS-DOS Prompt..........................40
                Starting GUF - From Windows 95........................41
                Starting GUF - From The Windows 95 "Programs" Menu....42
                Starting GUF - From The Windows 95 "Run" Menu.........43
                Starting GUF - From The Windows 95 DOS Box
                               MS-DOS Prompt..........................43
                Starting GUF - From Windows 95 In MS-DOS Mode.........44
        
        CHAPTER 6:  COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX...............................46
                The Command Line Syntax...............................46
                "File/Dir"............................................47
                The "/M" Switch.......................................48
                The "/W" Switch.......................................48
                The "/T" Switch.......................................48
        
        CHAPTER 7:  RUNNING GUF.......................................49
                Menu Driven Operation.................................49
                Keyboard Operation Only (No Mouse!)...................49
                Commonly Used Keys....................................49
                Function Keys.........................................50
                Finding The Key(s) To Use.............................50
        
        CHAPTER 8:  TEST DRIVE & TUTORIAL.............................52
                Using This Chapter As A Tutorial......................52
                The Initial Screen....................................52
                Other Ways Of Viewing The Files Found.................53
                What If No Files Are Found?...........................54
                Creating "Longs" For Non-GIFs.........................55
                "Shorts"..............................................59
        
        CHAPTER 9:  CONCEPTS & TERMINOLOGY............................60
                "Levels"..............................................60
                "Video Modes".........................................60
                "Fonts"...............................................60
                "Platforms"...........................................60
                "Wanted Files"........................................60
                "Matching Files"......................................60
                "Shorts"..............................................60
                "Longs"...............................................60

        Table of Contents -------------------------------- Page 4 of 202
        
        CHAPTER 10:  THE "DRIVES" LEVEL...............................61
                Screen Layout.........................................61
                Operating The "Drives" Level..........................62
                Selecting Another Drive...............................62
                F1 = Toggle Format....................................63
                Turning The Page......................................64
                Changing The Level (Nesting Up And Down)..............65
                Changing The View.....................................65
                Quitting GUF..........................................65
                Warning! MS-DOS Before Version 4.01...................66
        
        CHAPTER 11:  THE "WANTED FILES" LEVEL.........................67
                Wanted File Categorys.................................67
                GIFs..................................................67
                GIFs & Common Non-GIFs................................68
                Common Non-GIFs.......................................68
                Uncommon Non-GIFs.....................................69
                Unlikely Non-GIFs.....................................69
                GUF Support Files.....................................70
                Shorts................................................70
                Longs.................................................71
                Screen Layout.........................................72
                Operating The "Wanted Files" Level....................73
                Selecting Another "Wanted File Category"..............73
                Turning The Page......................................74
                Changing The Level (Nesting Up And Down)..............75
                Changing The View.....................................75
                Quitting GUF..........................................75
        
        CHAPTER 12:  THE "DIRECTORYS" LEVEL...........................76
                Screen Layout.........................................77
                Operating The "Directorys" Level......................78
                The "Key Summary".....................................79
                The "Search Details" Box..............................80
                Selecting A Directory - To "View" Or "Load"...........81
                "Viewing" The Selected Directory's Files..............81
                "Loading" The Selected Directory's Files..............82
                Turning The Page......................................85
                Changing The Level (Nesting Up And Down)..............86
                Changing The View.....................................86
                Quitting GUF..........................................86
                The ("Directorys" Level) "Main Menu"..................87
                The "Video Modes" & "Fonts" Boxes.....................88
                The "Find & Load Files" Option........................89
        
        CHAPTER 13:  THE "FILES (STATS ONLY)" LEVEL...................94
                Screen Layout.........................................95
                Operating The "Files (Stats Only)" Level..............96
                The "Key Summary".....................................97
                The "Search Details" Box..............................98
                Selecting A File Or Directory.........................98
                Selecting A File - To "View" Or "Inspect".............99
                The "Inspect Internal Structure" Option..............101
                Selecting A Directory - To "View" Or "Load"..........101

        Table of Contents -------------------------------- Page 5 of 202
        
        CHAPTER 13:  THE "FILES (STATS ONLY)" LEVEL cont'd
                "Viewing" The Selected Directory's Files.............102
                "Loading" The Selected Directory's Files.............103
                Turning The Page.....................................103
                Changing The Level (Nesting Up And Down).............104
                Changing The View....................................104
                Quitting GUF.........................................104
                The "Main Menu"......................................105
                The "Video Modes" & "Fonts" Boxes....................107
                The "Find & Load Files" Option.......................107
        
        CHAPTER 14:  THE "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" LEVEL............108
                Screen Layout........................................109
                Operating The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level.......110
                The "Key Summary"....................................111
                The "Search Details" Box.............................112
                Selecting A File - To "View" Or "Inspect"............112
                Turning The Page.....................................114
                Changing The Level (Nesting Up And Down).............114
                Changing The View....................................114
                Quitting GUF.........................................115
                The "Main Menu"......................................115
                The "Video Modes" & "Fonts" Boxes....................117
                The "Find & Load Files" Option.......................117
                The "Set-Up" Option..................................117
                Colour Space.........................................119
                Gray Scale Translation Method........................120
                Graphic Window Border................................121
                Graphic Window Border Size...........................121
                Graphic Window Border Colour.........................121
                Preserve Menu Colours?...............................121
                Menu Colour Scheme...................................122
        
        CHAPTER 15:  THE "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL................123
                Screen Layout........................................123
                The "Pop-Up" Boxes...................................124
                The "Header" Box.....................................125
                The "Scroll Keys" Box................................125
                The "Files" Box......................................126
                The "Video Modes" Box................................127
                The "Fonts" Box......................................129
                The "Stats" Box......................................131
                The "Keys" Box.......................................132
                Operating The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level...........132
                P = Toggle Palette...................................134
                Scrolling Around The Graphic (Or Screen).............134
                Home -*- End -*- PgUp -*- PgDn.......................137
                T=Top -*- B=Bottom -*- R=Right -*- L=Left............138
                C=Centre -*- H=Centre Horizontally -*-
                V=Centre Vertically..................................140
                UpArrow -*- DownArrow -*- LeftArrow -*- RightArrow...141
                Changing The Level (Nesting Up And Down).............143
                Changing The View....................................143
                Quitting GUF.........................................143
                The "Main Menu"......................................144

        Table of Contents -------------------------------- Page 6 of 202
        
        CHAPTER 16:  THE "FULL SCREEN (ORIGINALS)" LEVEL.............146
        
        CHAPTER 17:  CREATING, SELECTING & DELETING "SHORTS".........147
                The "Shorts" Box Main Screen.........................147
                The "Shorts" Box Keys................................148
                F3 = Rotate Fit......................................150
                The Short Status Indicators..........................151
                Analysing The Short Status Indicators................153
                "Actioning" A Source File............................154
                Editing The Source File Specific Create Options......155
                Creating Shorts For A Single Source File.............159
                Deleting Shorts For A Single Source File.............165
                Viewing Shorts.......................................166
                "Actioning" A Short..................................167
                "Selecting" A Short..................................168
                "Un-Selecting" A Short...............................170
                "Deleting" A Short...................................171
                The Main Menu........................................172
        
        CHAPTER 18:  CREATING & DELETING "LONGS".....................174
                The "Longs" Box Main Screen..........................174
                The "Longs" Box Keys.................................175
                "Actioning" A Source File............................177
                Creating Longs For A Single Source File..............177
                "Actioning" A Long...................................180
                "Deleting" A Long....................................180
                The Main Menu........................................181
        
        CHAPTER 19:  SHAREWARE & REGISTRATION........................182
                Introduction.........................................182
                Personal Registration................................182
                Corporate Registration...............................183
                No "Registered" Version..............................183
                Payment Methods......................................184
                Personal Registration Form...........................184
                Corporate Registration Form..........................187
        
        APPENDIX 1:  VERSIONS........................................191
                Version 1A...........................................191
                Version 1B...........................................191
                Version 1C...........................................191
        
        APPENDIX 2:  NEW FEATURES OF VERSION 1B......................192
                Directory And File Names Longer Than 80 Characters...193
                Non Dos-Accessible (Windows Only) Directorys.........193
                New "Wanted Files" Categorys.........................195
                Multiple "Wanted Files" Categorys Can Be Selected....196
                New "What Do You Want To Do With This Directory"
                Menu.................................................196
                New "What Do You Want To Do With This File?" Menu....197
                New Convert Option...................................198
        
        APPENDIX 3:  NEW FEATURES OF VERSION 1C......................199
                Tree Mode At Start-Up................................199
                The GUF Version 1C User Manual.......................200
                Free Upgrade From/To Versions 1A And 1B..............200

        Table of Contents -------------------------------- Page 7 of 202
        
        APPENDIX 4:  HOW TO CONTACT US...............................201
        
        APPENDIX 5:  ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS................................202

        Chapter 1: Introduction -------------------------- Page 8 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 1                          ##
        ##                        INTRODUCTION                        ##
        ################################################################
        
        ================================================================
                              WHAT DOES "GUF" DO?
        ================================================================
        
        GUF is a graphic file SEARCH ENGINE and VIEWER program.
        
        The SEARCH ENGINE lets you (rapidly) locate GRAPHIC files - on a 
        hard or floppy (or whatever) type disk,
        
        The VIEWER lets you VIEW the graphics found.
        
        ================================================================
                          SEARCHING FOR GRAPHIC FILES
        ================================================================
        
        You can search the entire disk - or any sub-directory - or 
        sub-directory TREE - thereon.
        
        ================================================================
                             VIEWING GRAPHIC FILES
        ================================================================
        
        The file VIEWER will DIRECTLY display GIF files only.
        
        However, GUF can display ANY of the the graphic file formats 
        supported. This is achieved, by converting them to GIF files 
        first.
        
        This file conversion is handled internally by GUF - using the 
        Image Alchemy graphic file format conversion program (supplied).
        
        Since Image Alchemy handles a large number of file formats (see 
        below), you can view almost any of the common graphic file 
        formats (and quite a large number of obscure ones too).
        
        ================================================================
                WHICH (GRAPHIC) FILE FORMATS DOES "GUF" SUPPORT?
        ================================================================
        
        GUF will search for, and let you view, the following (graphic) 
        file formats:-
        
                GIFS...
                        *.GIF
        
                COMMON (IMAGE ALCHEMY SUPPORTED) NON-GIFS...
                        *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF

        Chapter 1: Introduction -------------------------- Page 9 of 202

                UNCOMMON (IMAGE ALCHEMY SUPPORTED) NON-GIFS...
                        *.A   *.CLP *.FOP *.IBG *.LBM *.PNM *.RTL *.XBM
                        *.ART *.CLR *.GIS *.IDC *.MAC *.PPM *.R8  *.XPM
                        *.ASC *.CM  *.GM  *.IDX *.MTV *.PRE *.SCD *.XWD
                        *.A8  *.CRF *.GM2 *.IFF *.P   *.PZL *.SCX
                        *.BIF *.CUT *.GM4 *.IM  *.PAL *.QDV *.SGI
                        *.BIL *.DCX *.GOE *.IMG *.PBM *.Q0  *.SST
                        *.BM  *.EPI *.GRB *.IMQ *.PCL *.RAS *.TAB
                        *.B8  *.EPS *.G8  *.IM1 *.PDF *.RGB *.VI
                        *.CAL *.ERS *.HDR *.IM8 *.PGM *.RIX *.VIT
                        *.CEL *.FAL *.HRF *.LAN *.PM  *.RLE *.WPG
        
                UNLIKELY (IMAGE ALCHEMY SUPPORTED) NON-GIFS...
                        *.DAT *.PRN
        
        ================================================================
                    SEARCHING FOR OTHER GRAPHIC FILE FORMATS
        ================================================================
        
        You can SEARCH for other graphic file formats (ones NOT listed 
        above) - by entering their FILENAME.EXTs - with or without the 
        standard MS-DOS wildcards ("?" and "*") - on the command line - 
        when you start GUF.
        
        For example, to search for "*.GFX" files, start GUF with:-
                GUF *.GFX <Enter>
        
        However, you would only be able to VIEW these files, if they 
        were either; GIFs, or; one of the other graphic file formats 
        that Image Alchemy recognises.
        
        ================================================================
                             HARDWARE REQUIREMENTS
        ================================================================
        
        GUF requires:-
        
                -  An IBM PC (8086 or better)
                -  VGA video card, or better
                -  Colour monitor

        Chapter 1: Introduction ------------------------- Page 10 of 202

        ================================================================
                             SOFTWARE REQUIREMENTS
        ================================================================
        
        GUF requires:-
        
                -  MS-DOS Version 2.00 or later
        
        More specifically, it should run under any version of MS-DOS; 
        from (and including) MS-DOS Version 2.00, up to (and including) 
        Windows 95.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        GUF (Version 1c) was developed and tested under:-
                MS-DOS Version 4.01
        
        And it's been tested (and appears to run properly,) under:-
                Windows 95
                (both in the DOS box, and in pure MS-DOS mode).
        
        It has NOT been tested under:-
                MS-DOS Version 2.xx
                MS-DOS Version 3.xx
                MS-DOS Version 5.xx
                MS-DOS Version 6.xx
        or;     Windows 3.xx.
        
        though I assume it will run under those operating systems.
        
        ================================================================
                                  REGISTRATION
        ================================================================
        
        GUF (Version 1c) is Shareware, and MUST be registered:-
        
                ($ NZ 99 per copy)
        
        IF YOU CONTINUE TO USE IT (after the max. 30 day evaluation
        period).
        
        NOTE!  You MAY not need to register this version of GUF, if 
               you've already registered an acceptable subsequent 
               version.  See the UPGRADES policy, for the version you've 
               registered.
        
        Both personal and corporate registration is available.
        
        See the Chapter entitled "SHAREWARE & REGISTRATION", for full 
        registration details.

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 11 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##			   Chapter 2			      ##
        ##                        A QUICK TOUR                        ##
        ################################################################
        
        This Chapter is intended to quickly describe what GUF does.
        
        ================================================================
        			    "LEVELS"
        ================================================================
        
        First, we should explain that GUF is organised into seven 
        "LEVELS":-
        
                Level 1  =  DRIVES                        |      /^\
                Level 2  =  WANTED FILES                  |       |
                Level 3  =  DIRECTORYS                    |       |
                Level 4  =  FILES (STATS ONLY)         (Enter)  (Esc)
                Level 5  =  FILES (STATS & PICTURES)      |       |
                Level 6  =  FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)          |       |
                Level 7  =  FULL SCREEN (ORIGINALS)      \_/      |
        
        Each level is, in effect, a separate little program.
        
        You move through these levels, by using the Enter and Esc keys.  
        Enter nests you DOWN; Esc nests you UP.
        
        We describe these levels, separately, on the following pages.
        
        ================================================================
                               "SHORTS" & "LONGS"
        ================================================================
        
        The level descriptions on the following pages, refer to "Shorts" 
        and "Longs".
        
        A "Short", is a scaled copy of a source file, that fits the 
        screen or window in which it is to be displayed, more or less 
        exactly.  "Shorts" let you eliminate the inconvenience, of 
        having to scroll around graphics that are too big for the 
        screen.
        
        A "Long" is a same-size copy, in GIF format, of a (non-GIF) 
        source file.  "Longs" let you view any of the graphic file 
        formats supported by Image Alchemy (see above).
        
        "Shorts" and "Longs" are described more fully, elsewhere in this 
        manual.

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 12 of 202

        ================================================================
                               THE "DRIVES" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        The "Drives" level:-
        
        	a)  LISTS the DRIVES available on your PC,
        
        and;    b)  lets you SELECT the DRIVE, that you wish to search
                    for and view (graphic) files on.
        
        A typical "Drives" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |		     Level 1 of 7 - Drives		       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  A  DRIVE...    Letter:  A 			    |  |
        |  |		       Type:  Floppy disk 3.5" 1.44Mb       |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  C  DRIVE...    Letter:  C 			    |  |
        |  |		       Type:  Hard disk 500Mb		    |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown	      F1=ToggleFormat  A-Z=SelectDrive |
        | Page1of2  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        When GUF starts, the drive (to search for and view graphic files 
        on), DEFAULTS to either:-
        
        	-  The MS-DOS CURRENT DRIVE; if you started GUF with:-
                        GUF <Enter>
        
            or; -  The DRIVE YOU SPECIFY; if you started GUF with:-
                        GUF d:\directory[\file] <Enter>
        
        Thus, you only need to use "Drives" level, to CHANGE to ANOTHER 
        DRIVE (to search for and view graphic files on).

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 13 of 202

        ================================================================
                            THE "WANTED FILES" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        The "Wanted Files" level:-
        
        	a)  LISTS the "wanted files" that GUF supports,
        
        and;	b)  Lets you SELECT the "wanted files", to search for
        	    and view.
        
        A typical "Wanted Files" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |		  Level 2 of 7 - Wanted Files		       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |  1  GIFS						       |
        |	*.GIF						       |
        |							       |
        |  2  GIFS & COMMON NON-GIFS				       |
        |	*.GIF *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF        |
        |							       |
        |  3  COMMON NON-GIFS					       |
        |	*.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF	       |
        |							       |
        |  4  UNCOMMON NON-GIFS 				       |
        |	*.A *.ART *.ASC *.A8 *.BIF *.BIL *.BM *.B8 *.CAL       |
        |	*.CEL *.CLP *.CLR *.CM *.CRF *.CUT *.DCX *.EPI *.EPS   |
        |	*.ERS *.FAL *.FOP *.GIS *.GM *.GM2 *.GM4 *.GOE *.GRB   |
        |	*.G8 *.HDR *.HRF *.IBG *.IDC *.IDX *.IFF *.IM *.IMG    |
        |	*.IMQ *.IM1 *.IM8 *.LAN *.LBM *.MAC *.MTV *.P *.PAL    |
        |	*.PBM *.PCL *.PDF *.PGM *.PM *.PNM *.PPM *.PRE *.PZL   |
        |	*.QDV *.Q0 *.RAS *.RGB *.RIX *.RLE *.RTL *.R8 *.SCD    |
        |	*.SCX *.SGI *.SST *.TAB *.VI *.VIT *.WPG *.XBM *.XPM   |
        |	*.XWD						       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp   1-Z=SelectWantedFiles(Category) |
        | Page1of2  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        "Wanted files", are the GRAPHIC and GUF SUPPORT files that GUF 
        recognises.
        
        GUF identifies these files, by FILENAME.EXT.  For example:-
        	  "GIFs", are files with "*.GIF" FILENAME.EXTs,
        	 "JPEGs", are files with "*.JPG" FILENAME.EXTs,
        and;	"Shorts", are files with "*.KRT" FILENAME.EXTs.

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 14 of 202

        The "wanted files" are grouped into EIGHT categorys:-
                GIFS
                GIFS & COMMON NON-GIFS
        
                COMMON NON-GIFS
                UNCOMMON NON-GIFS
                UNLIKELY NON-GIFS
        
                GUF SUPPORT FILES
                SHORTS
        and;    LONGS.
        
        Thus, by selecting a "wanted files" category, you can quickly 
        select the type of graphic or GUF support file, that you want to 
        search for and list/view.
        
        NOTE!  The DEFAULT "wanted files" category, is "GIFs & Common 
               Non-GIFs".

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 15 of 202

        ================================================================
                             THE "DIRECTORYS" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        The "Directorys" level:-
        
        	a)  LISTS the directorys (if any), that were found, 
        	    containing "wanted" and/or "matching" files (*),
        
        and;	b)  Lets you SELECT any of the directorys listed, to 
        	    load or view.
        
        (*)  If NO "wanted" or "matching" files were found, then there 
             will be NO directorys to list.  A "No Wanted or Matching 
             Files" error messagem, will be displayed instead.
        
        A typical "Directorys" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |		   Level 3 of 7 - Directorys		       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |		      GIFs From C:\ (TREE)		    |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1  C:\MONET\	   15 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  2  C:\DOWNLOAD\	   80 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  3  C:\RENOIR\	    5 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp		       /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Thus, the "Directorys" level provides an overview of the 
        "wanted" and/or "matching" files, in the currently selected 
        drive and directory (tree).

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 16 of 202

        ================================================================
        		 THE "FILES (STATS ONLY)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats Only)" level:-
        
        	a)  LISTS the "wanted" and "matching" files (if any,) 
        	    that were found (*),
        
        and;	b)  Lets you SELECT any file listed; to view, or for 
        	    further processing (copy, delete, etc).
        
        (*)  If NO "wanted" or "matching" files were found, then there 
             will be NONE to list.  A "No Wanted or Matching Files" 
             error message, will be displayed instead.
        
        A typical "Files (Stats Only)" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |	       Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)	       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |		Common Non-GIFs From C:\ (TREE) 	    |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1  C:\MONET\	    8 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     2   MONETADR.JPG	 320w 200h 256 colours	 12,345 bytes  |
        |     3   MONETARG.JPG	 320w 200h 256 colours	 12,345 bytes  |
        |     4   MONETBCH.JPG	 320w 200h 256 colours	 12,345 bytes  |
        |     5   MONETCAP.JPG	 320w 200h 256 colours	 12,345 bytes  |
        |     6   MONETGRN.JPG	 320w 200h 256 colours	 12,345 bytes  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  7  C:\RENOIR\	   30 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     8   RENOIR1.PCX	 640w 480h 256 colours	 99,999 bytes  |
        |     9   RENOIR2.PCX	 640w 480h 256 colours	 99,999 bytes  |
        |     A   RENOIR3.PCX	 640w 480h 256 colours	 99,999 bytes  |
        |							       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp		       /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of9  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        The "Files (Stats Only)" level, is effectively, a souped-up, and 
        graphic file oriented, equivalent, of the MS-DOS DIR command.
        
        The files are listed, on a 1 line per file basis, with each line 
        showing the file's FILENAME.EXT, and SIZE (in pixels, colours 
        and bytes).  

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 17 of 202

        ================================================================
        	      THE "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Like the "Files (Stats Only)" level, the "Files (Stats & 
        Pictures)" level:-
        
        	a)  LISTS the "wanted" and "matching" files (if any,) 
        	    that were found (*),
        
        and;	b)  Lets you SELECT any file listed; to view, or for 
        	    further processing (copy, delete, etc).
        
        (*)  If NO "wanted" or "matching" files were found, then there 
             will be NONE to list.  A "No Wanted or Matching Files" 
             error message, will be displayed instead.
        
        The difference between the two levels, is that the "Files (Stats 
        & Pictures)" level also shows each file's GRAPHIC - in a window, 
        immediately above the FILENAME.EXT and SIZE data.
        
        A typical "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |	    Level 5 of 7 - Files (Stats & Pictures)	       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |		Common Non-GIFs From C:\ (TREE) 	    |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |							       |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  C:\MONET\ 	      1 of 5 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |	  +-------------------------------------------------+  |
        |	  |						    |  |
        |	  |	    (THE FILE'S GRAPHIC GOES HERE)          |  |
        |	  |						    |  |
        |	  +-------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     1   MONETADR.JPG	 320w 200h 256 colours	 12,345 bytes  |
        |							       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp		       /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of5  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        By DEFAULT, the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, displays 1 
        file per page.	However, you can display MULTIPLE files per 
        page, if you want to.

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 18 of 202

        ================================================================
                        THE "FULL-SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level:-
        
                a)  DISPLAYS a single (graphic) file - either; the SHORT 
                    (if the file has one), or; the SOURCE FILE or LONG 
                    (if it does not),
        
        and;    b)  Allows you to SCROLL around the graphic (if the 
                    graphic is too big for the screen).
        
        A typical "Full Screen (Shorts)" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                 +--------------------------+                 |
        |       +---------+  View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk  +--------+        |
        |       |  GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer  |        |
        |       +--+  Level 6 of 7 - Full Screen (Shorts)  +--+        |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |                                                              |
        |                       +-----------------------------------+  |
        |                       |             C:\MONET\             |  |
        |                       |        Graphic File 1 of 5        |  |
        |                       |  [=First  <=Prev  >=Next  ]=Last  |  |
        |                       |            MONETBCH.JPG           |  |
        |                       |           (GIF00001.KRT)          |  |
        |                       +-----------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |           (The graphic is centered on the screen,            |
        |          underneath any surrounding "pop-up" boxes)          |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp  Spacebar=+/-PopUps         |  |
        |  |                            P=+/-PopUpsPalette  /=Menu  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, thus gives you the full-screen 
        to view a single graphic on, and lets you scroll around the 
        graphic, if it is too big for the screen.
        
        Note also, that in order to give you the maximum amount of 
        screen area for viewing the graphic, any ancilliary information 
        - "menus" and file data, etc - is displayed in "pop-up" boxes, 
        that appear over the graphic, and around the edges of the 
        screen.
        
        These boxes can be individually enabled and disabled - so you 
        don't have to waste screen area displaying useless information. 
        And they can be collectively erased and re-drawn - so you can 
        quickly toggle them OFF and ON the screen - by pressing the 
        Spacebar.
        

        Chapter 2: A Quick Tour ------------------------- Page 19 of 202

        ================================================================
                      THE "FULL-SCREEN (ORIGINALS)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        The "Full Screen (Originals)" level, is the same as the "Full 
        Screen (Shorts)" level - except that it displays the SOURCE FILE 
        (or LONG) only.  (The SHORT, if there is one, is ignored.)
        
        ================================================================
                                    SUMMARY
        ================================================================
        
        GUF is a MENU-DRIVEN program, that lets you move around your 
        drives and directorys, SEARCHING FOR, LISTING AND VIEWING 
        GRAPHIC FILES, in a large variety of common (and not-so-common) 
        (graphic file) formats.

        Chapter 3: Quick Start Instructions ------------- Page 20 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##			   Chapter 3			      ##
        ##                  QUICK START INSTRUCTIONS                  ##
        ################################################################
        
        If you just can't wait to get started, this Chapter contains the 
        basic info. you need.
        
        I've kept it as short as possible - just FOUR pages - but please 
        read it ALL, before trying to install and run GUF.
        
                                     NOTE!
                                     -----
        As well as these "Quick Start Instructions", we recommend that 
        you ALSO READ the following Chapters:-
        
        	"A QUICK TOUR"
        and;	"TEST DRIVE & TUTORIAL",
        
        before trying to USE GUF.
        
        ================================================================
        			  INSTALLATION
        ================================================================
        
        NONE IS REQUIRED.
        
        Once you've got a copy of GUF.EXE, you can RUN it, without any
        further ado.
        
        Actually, this is an oversimplication.  TO INSTALL GUF, YOU
        MUST:-
        
        	a)  CREATE a DIRECTORY (which we suggest you call 
                    \GUF1C\), on the drive onto which you want to
        	    install GUF,
        
        and;    b)  COPY (or UN-ZIP) the GUF files:-
                        GUF.BAT       (optional)
        		GUF.EXE       (ESSENTIAL)
        		ALCHEMY.EXE   (optional)
        		REDSWAPM.EXE  (optional)
        		REDSWAPS.EXE  (optional)
                        MANUAL.TXT    (optional)
        		BARTCLR.GIF   (optional)
        		SAMPLE.JPG    (optional)
        	    thereto.
        
        IN ADDITION:-
        
                a)  If you will be launching GUF from the MS-DOS prompt,
        
        and;    b)  Want the convenience of being able to launch GUF, 
                    from ANY drive or directory, by typing:-
                        GUF <Enter>

        Chapter 3: Quick Start Instructions ------------- Page 21 of 202

        THEN:-
        
                a)  COPY GUF.BAT to a directory in your search PATH,
        
        and;    b)  EDIT GUF.BAT.
        
                    NOTE!  THIS LAST STEP IS ONLY REQUIRED, IF YOU 
                           INSTALLED GUF INTO A DIRECTORY OTHER THAN 
                           C:\GUF1C\.
        
                    You will need to replace the "C:\GUF1C" in GUF.BAT,
                    with the details of the drive and directory into 
                    which you installed GUF.
        
        If you're an MS-DOS/Windows "POWER USER", that's probably all
        you need to know.
        
        If you're NOT an MS-DOS/Windows "power user", refer to the 
        Chapter entitled "INSTALLING GUF", for step-by-step 
        instructions.
        
        ================================================================
                           STARTING GUF - FROM MS-DOS
        ================================================================
        
        TO START GUF, from either:-
        
                MS-DOS,
        
        or;     the MS-DOS prompt, under Windows,
        
        TYPE:-
        
                C: <Enter>              NOTES!
        
                                        1.  This example assumes that
                                            you installed GUF onto drive 
                                            C.  If you installed GUF 
                                            onto another drive, replace 
                                            the drive letter ("C") 
                                            accordingly.
        
                                        2.  If you installed GUF.BAT (as 
                                            described above), this step 
                                            is NOT required.

        Chapter 3: Quick Start Instructions ------------- Page 22 of 202

                CD \GUF1C <Enter>       NOTES!
        
                                        1.  This example assumes that 
                                            you installed GUF into 
                                            \GUF1C. If you installed GUF
                                            into another directory, 
                                            replace the directory name 
                                            ("\GUF1C") accordingly.
        
                                        2.  If you installed GUF.BAT (as 
                                            described above), this step 
                                            is NOT required.
        
                GUF <Enter>
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        GUF does have a COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX - which is somewhat similar 
        to that of the MS-DOS DIR command.
        
        Thus, to start GUF, so that it will search for graphic files in 
        C:\GRAPHICS, for example, you could type:-
        
                C:              <Enter>
                CD \GUF1C       <Enter>
                GUF C:\GRAPHICS <Enter>
        
        However, GUF is a MENU-DRIVEN program.	So, the command-line 
        syntax is probably not of much interest, if you're just 
        evaluating GUF.
        
        But, if you want to know more, the Chapter entitled 
        "COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX", describes GUF's command-line syntax in 
        full.
        
        ================================================================
                         STARTING GUF - FROM WINDOWS 95
        ================================================================
        
        To start GUF, from Windows 95, use ANY of the Windows 95 
        supported methods of running an MS-DOS program.
        
        If you're a Windows 95 "power user", then you know how to run 
        MS-DOS programs, from Windows 95.
        
        If you're NOT a Windows 95 "power user", then refer to the 
        Chapter entitled "STARTING GUF", for step-by-step instructions.

        Chapter 3: Quick Start Instructions ------------- Page 23 of 202

        NOTE!
        -----
        
        Under Windows 95, GUF will run in EITHER:-
        	-  A DOS box,
        OR;	-  MS-DOS mode.
        
        However, under Windows 95, GUF RUNS MUCH FASTER IN A DOS BOX, 
        than it does in MS-DOS mode.  SO, WE STRONGLY RECOMMEND THAT YOU 
        RUN GUF IN A DOS BOX.
        
        ================================================================
                       USING GUF - ONCE YOU'VE STARTED IT
        ================================================================
        
        GUF is MENU-DRIVEN - and the main keys used are displayed ON 
        SCREEN (in most cases, on the SCREEN FOOTER, at the bottom of 
        the screen).
        
        So, you shouldn't have much trouble finding your way, once 
        you've started GUF.
        
        However, before trying to use GUF, we recommend that you ALSO 
        READ the following Chapters:-
        
        	"A QUICK TOUR"
        and;	"TEST DRIVE & TUTORIAL",
        
        These Chapters will give you an OVERVIEW of what GUF does, and 
        how it does it.  Reading them, BEFORE YOU START, will cut your
        learning time no end.
        
        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        To quit GUF, once you've started it, press /Q.
        
        However, you can only do this from the bottom 5 levels - the 
        "Directorys" to "Full Screen (Originals)" levels, inclusive.
        
        To quit the program from either of the top two levels - the 
        "Drives" and "Wanted Files" levels - you must nest down to one 
        of the lower levels, by pressing Enter, once or twice, first.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 24 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 4                          ##
        ##                       INSTALLING GUF                       ##
        ################################################################
        
        This Chapter describes how to install GUF, onto hard (or other) 
        type disk.
        
        It applies, whether you're installing GUF under MS-DOS or under 
        Windows.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        There are SMALL differences between installing GUF under MS-DOS 
        as compared to installing GUF under Windows, but these are dealt 
        with as they occur.
        
        ================================================================
                              INSTALLATION SUMMARY
        ================================================================
        
        GUF requires no special installation.
        
        In brief, just:-
        
                a)  CREATE a DIRECTORY, which we suggest you call
                        \GUF1C\
                    to hold the GUF files,
        
        and then;-
        
                b)  UN-ZIP (or COPY) the GUF files, thereto.
        
        If you're installing GUF under MS-DOS (or to run under the 
        MS-DOS prompt under Windows), we ALSO recommend that you:-
        
                c)  COPY the GUF.BAT file, to any directory in your 
                    search PATH.
        
                    GUF.BAT calls GUF.EXE, no matter where you installed 
                    GUF.EXE.  Once you've copied GUF.BAT to a directory 
                    in your search PATH, you will be able to run GUF, 
                    from ANY DRIVE OR DIRECTORY, simply by typing:-
                        GUF <Enter>

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 25 of 202

        ================================================================
                                   THE FILES
        ================================================================
        
        The complete GUF package comprises EIGHT files:-
        
        The ESSENTIAL files are:-
        
                GUF.EXE         The main program file.
        
                                As a minimum - and if you don't want to 
                                VIEW anything other than GIF files - 
                                GUF.EXE is ALL YOU NEED.
        
                                The remaining files are OPTIONAL.
        
                                However, for EVALUATION purposes, we 
                                recommend that you install ALL eight
                                files.
        
        The OPTIONAL files are:-
        
                GUF.BAT         Calls GUF.EXE.  If you place this file 
                                in a directory in your search PATH, then 
                                you will be able to start GUF (from the 
                                MS-DOS prompt), from ANY drive or 
                                directory, by typing:-
                                        GUF <Enter>
        
                                (See the Chapter entitled "INSTALLING 
                                GUF", for more details of this.)
        
                                ONLY REQUIRED, if:-
                                        a)  You want the convenience of 
                                            being able to launch GUF 
                                            from ANY drive or directory, 
                                            by typing:-
                                                GUF <Enter>
                                when;   b)  Launching GUF from the
                                            MS-DOS prompt.
        
                ALCHEMY.EXE     The Image Alchemy program.
        
                                Image Alchemy is (only) used to create 
                                "Shorts" and "Longs".  These are both 
                                useful features, so you probably will 
                                want to install Image Alchemy.
        
        			However, Image Alchemy is a SHAREWARE 
        			program, so if you keep and use it, you 
        			must REGISTER it.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 26 of 202

                                So, if you don't want to register Image 
                                Alchemy, and you can live without 
                                "Shorts" and "Longs", then you can 
                                dispense with Image Alchemy.
        
                                NOTE!  "Shorts" are a convenience 
                                       feature.  "Longs" are required, 
                                       if you want to VIEW files other 
                                       than GIF files.
        
                REDSWAPM.EXE    The Swap program.
                REDSWAPS.EXE
        
        			This program is ONLY used to run Image 
        			Alchemy.  (Even then, it is only needed 
        			if Image Alchemy fails, due to lack of 
        			memory.)
        
        			So, if either; a) you don't install 
        			Image Alchemy (ALCHEMY.EXE), or; b) you 
        			don't encounter memory problems when you 
        			run Image Alchemy, you don't need the 
        			Swap program (REDSWAPM.EXE and 
        			REDSWAPS.EXE).
        
                MANUAL.TXT      The User Manual.  (This file.)
        
                                GUF.EXE doesn't have an on-line User 
                                Manual reader, so it doesn't care 
                                whether MANUAL.TXT is available or not.
        
                BARTCLR.GIF     Sample GIF graphic file
                SAMPLE.JPG      Sample non-GIF (JPEG) graphic file.
        
                                These graphics are provided, so that 
                                you've got something to look at when 
                                evaluating GUF.  GUF.EXE however, 
                                doesn't use these files.
        
        ================================================================
                     THE GUF SHAREWARE DISTRIBUTION ARCHIVE
        ================================================================
        
        GUF was originally released, in a "*.ZIP" archive file:-
        
                GUF1C.ZIP       573,080 bytes   16 July 1998
        
        This file contains all eight files, listed above.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 27 of 202

        ================================================================
                            DISK SPACE REQUIREMENTS
        ================================================================
        
        Here is (an extract from) the PKUNZIP technical info. report, 
        for the GUF Shareware distribution archive:-
        
        PKUNZIP (R)    FAST!    Extract Utility    Version 2.04g  02-01-93
        Copr. 1989-1993 PKWARE Inc. All Rights Reserved. Registered version
        PKUNZIP Reg. U.S. Pat. and Tm. Off.
        
        Searching ZIP: GUF1C.ZIP
        
         Length   Size     Date    Time    CRC-32  Attr  Name
         ------   -----    ----    ----   -------- ----  ----
             45      45  08-06-98  04:25  c0e42645 --w-  GUF.BAT
         112982   63997  10-06-98  10:36  e991b765 --w-  GUF.EXE
         960687  358124  15-04-94  01:49  068075ed --w-  ALCHEMY.EXE
          14109    7951  02-06-98  12:50  8246fafa --w-  REDSWAPM.EXE
           3093    1369  02-06-98  12:50  d40bc701 --w-  REDSWAPS.EXE
         487300   79101  10-06-98  11:40  3cf34eff --w-  MANUAL.TXT
           9344    9314  07-05-90  10:02  4f27f553 --w-  BARTCLR.GIF
          52767   52389  15-04-94  01:49  9ebe5808 --w-  SAMPLE.JPG
         ------  ------                                  -------
        1640327  572290                                        8
        
        As you can see, the complete GUF package comprises EIGHT files.  
        UN-compressed, those eight files occupy 1,640,327 bytes.  That's
        about 1.56 Mbytes.
        
        Thus GUF, un-compressed, will ALMOST (but not quite) fit onto a 
        1.44 Mbyte floppy.  However, you can get the GUF program files:-
        
                GUF.EXE           112,982 bytes
                ALCHEMY.EXE       960,687 bytes
                REDSWAPM.EXE       14,109 bytes
                REDSWAPS.EXE        3,093 bytes
                                ---------
                                1,090,871 bytes
        
        onto a 1.44 Mbyte floppy, no trouble.
        
        But, you'll have to leave off some (or all) of the following 
        (non-essential) files:-
        
                GUF.BAT              45 bytes
                MANUAL.TXT      487,300 bytes
                BARTCLR.GIF       9,344 bytes
                SAMPLE.JPG       52,767 bytes
        
        HOWEVER, YOU'LL HAVE NO TROUBLE IN INSTALLING GUF ONTO HARD
        DISK, OR A LARGE REMOVABLE MEDIUM, LIKE ZIP DISK, OR CD-ROM.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 28 of 202

        NOTES!
        ------
        
        1.  The GUF files have been zipped up (into GUF1C.ZIP), with the
            most important files first.  So, you can un-ZIP GUF1C.ZIP
            DIRECTLY onto a 1.44 Mbyte floppy.
        
            When the disk becomes full, PKUNZIP will issue a "Disk Full" 
            error message, and abort.  Thus, any files that will not fit 
            onto the disk, will be left off (in the reverse order of 
            which they appear in the ZIP file; see above).
        
        2.  You could also un-ZIP GUF onto a smaller (360 Kbyte, 720
            Kbyte or 1.2 Mbyte) floppy.  In this case, you'd get the 
            following files:-
                        GUF.BAT
            and;        GUF.EXE
            only.
        
            This is perfectly OK, if you want to use GUF as a GIF file 
            viewer only.
        
        3.  Don't rely on the file sizes and CRC-32s given in the above 
            report, for the following files:-
        
                GUF.EXE
                MANUAL.TXT
                REDSWAPM.EXE
                REDSWAPS.EXE
        
            These files are being updated all the time, so those values 
            are continually changing (though the file sizes, at least, 
            should be APPROXIMATELY correct).
        
            The file sizes and CRC-32s for the remaining files:-
        
                GUF.BAT
                ALCHEMY.EXE
                BARTCLR.GIF
                SAMPLE.JPG
        
            should be correct.
        
        ================================================================
                          GETTING TO THE MS-DOS PROMPT
        ================================================================
        
        These installation instructions, describe how to install GUF, 
        FROM THE MS-DOS PROMPT.
        
        If you're installing GUF under MS-DOS, then we assume that you 
        know how to get to the MS-DOS prompt.
        
        If you're installing GUF under Windows, you'll need to get to 
        the MS-DOS prompt, before you can start installing.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 29 of 202

        TO GET TO THE MS-DOS PROMPT, FROM WINDOWS 95:-
        
        1.  Go to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        2.  Click on "Start" (or press the Windows key).
        
        3.  The "Windows 95" menu will pop-up.
        
            Click on "Programs" (or press P twice, then press Enter).
        
        4.  The "Programs" menu (*) will pop-up.
        
            Click on "MS-DOS Prompt" (or press DownArrow, until you get 
            to "MS-DOS Prompt", then press Enter).
        
        5.  Windows 95 will then launch MS-DOS, in a DOS box.
        
            Typically, you'll see the following, at the top left of an 
            otherwise black screen:-
        
                Microsoft(R) Windows 95
                   (C)Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981-1996.
        
                C:\WINDOWS>
        
        ================================================================
                           CREATING THE GUF DIRECTORY
        ================================================================
        
        We recommend that you install GUF, into a separate directory; 
        and we recommend that you name this directory:-
        
                \GUF1C\
        
        To create such a directory, in the root directory of your hard 
        disk drive (drive C), for example:-
        
                Go to the MS-DOS prompt,
        
        and then type:-
        
                C:       <Enter>        (To select drive C)
        
                CD \     <Enter>        (To select drive C's root
        				directory)
        
                MD GUF1C <Enter>        (To create the required
                                        directory; C:\GUF1C\)
        
        If you want to install GUF onto another drive, or into another 
        directory (than those given in the above example), substitute 
        the appropriate drive letter and/or directory name, for the 
        drive letter ("C") and/or directory name ("GUF1C") used in the
        above example.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 30 of 202

        ================================================================
                          UN-ZIPPING THE ARCHIVE FILE
        ================================================================
        
        To UNZIP the archive file, you will need a copy of the PKUNZIP 
        de-compression program.
        
        (If you don't already have one, you should be able to find a 
        copy on most bulletin boards.)
        
        Once you've:-
        
        	a)  Got a copy of PKUNZIP,
        
        and;	b)  Created the directory that you want to install GUF 
        	    into,
        
        then, from the MS-DOS prompt, type:-
        
                C:\PKWARE\PKUNZIP.EXE C:\DOWNLOAD\GUF1C.ZIP C:\GUF1C <Enter>
        
        This assumes that:-
        
        	-  PKUNZIP.EXE is in the directory C:\PKWARE\
        
                -  GUF1C.ZIP   is in the directory C:\DOWNLOAD\
        
        and;    -  C:\GUF1C\   is the directory that you want to un-ZIP
        	   GUF into.
        
        Obviously, you may have to change some of the above drive, 
        directory and/or file names, to the values applicable to your 
        system.
        
        ================================================================
                  MAKING GUF EASIER TO START - FROM WINDOWS 95
        ================================================================
        
        If you're installing GUF under Windows 95, you can make it 
        easier to start, by adding it to the Windows 95 "Programs" menu 
        (*).
        
        If you do this, as described below, you will then be able to 
        start GUF, by clicking on "Start", "Programs" and "GUF".
        
        TO ADD GUF TO THE WINDOWS 95 "PROGRAMS" MENU (*):-
        
        1.  Go to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        2.  Click on "Start".
        
        3.  Click on "Settings".
        
        4.  Click on "Taskbar".

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 31 of 202

        5.  Click on "Start Menu Programs".
        
        6.  Click on "Add".
        
        7.  The "Create Shortcut" menu will pop-up.
        
            Type:-
                C:\GUF1C\GUF.EXE
            into the "Command Line" field, then press Enter.
        
            (If you installed GUF onto another drive, or into another 
            directory (than those given in the above example), 
            substitute the appropriate drive letter and/or directory 
            name, for the drive letter ("C") and/or directory name 
            ("GUF1C") used in the above example.)
        
        8.  The "Select Program Folder" menu will pop-up, with the 
            "Programs" folder highlighted.
        
            Click on "Next".
        
        9.  The "Select a Title for the Program" menu will pop-up.
        
            Type:-
                GUF
            into the "Select a name for the shortcut" field, then press 
            Enter.
        
        10.  GUF will then be added to the Windows 95 "Programs" menu 
             (*).
        
             Close the "Taskbar Properties" menu - and you'll be 
             returned to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        You should now be able to start GUF, by clicking on "Start", 
        "Programs" and "GUF".
        
        (*)  By "Programs" menu, I mean the un-labelled menu that 
             appears, when you click on "Start" and then "Programs".
        
        ================================================================
              MAKING GUF EASIER TO START - FROM THE MS-DOS PROMPT
        ================================================================
        
        This section, and the remaining sections in this Chapter, 
        describe how to install the GUF.BAT file, so as to make GUF 
        easier to start, from the MS-DOS prompt.
        
        The material is mainly applicable to MS-DOS users.  However, if 
        you're running GUF from the MS-DOS prompt, under Windows, you 
        may also find it useful.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 32 of 202

        ================================================================
                 STARTING GUF - BY ENTERING IT'S FULL PATHNAME
        ================================================================
        
        Once you've installed GUF, you can always start it (no matter 
        which drive and directory you are currently in), by typing 
        GUF.EXE's full drive, directory and file name (from the MS-DOS 
        prompt).
        
        For example, if you installed GUF into C:\GUF1C\, you could
        always start GUF with:-
        
                C:\GUF1C\GUF <Enter>
        
        ================================================================
                       STARTING GUF - WITH "GUF <ENTER>"
        ================================================================
        
        Typing GUF's full drive and path name, every time you run it, is 
        a little tedious.  And, it forces you to know, and remember, the 
        name of the drive and directory that you installed GUF into.
        
        It would obviously be easier, if you could start GUF, simply by 
        typing:-
        
                GUF <Enter>
        
        no matter what drive and/or directory you were currently in.
        
        Fortunately, MS-DOS will let you do this; though you'll have to 
        do a little set-up work (as described in the following 
        sections).
        
        ================================================================
                           HOW DOES MS-DOS FIND GUF?
        ================================================================
        
        Before describing how to set-up MS-DOS, so that you can start 
        GUF with "GUF <Enter>", we'll first give a little background.
        
        More specifically, we'll first describe what MS-DOS does, when 
        you type "GUF <Enter>".
        
        When you type "GUF <Enter>", at the MS-DOS prompt, MS-DOS, 
        first; searches for:-
        
                        GUF.COM
            then;       GUF.EXE
        and then;       GUF.BAT
        
        in the current (MS-DOS working) directory, and executes the 
        first of these that it finds.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 33 of 202

        If none of those files was found, MS-DOS then repeats that 
        search (for GUF.COM, GUF.EXE and GUF.BAT), in each directory (if 
        any), in your current search PATH, and executes the first of 
        these that it finds.
        
        If MS-DOS still can't find GUF.COM, GUF.EXE or GUF.BAT, it 
        issues the:-
        
                "Bad command or file name"
        
        error message, and returns to the MS-DOS prompt.
        
        ================================================================
              SETTING-UP MS-DOS - TO START GUF WITH "GUF <ENTER>"
        ================================================================
        
        With the above background in mind, there are TWO methods of 
        setting up MS-DOS, so that it will start GUF, when you type "GUF 
        <Enter>":-
        
                1.  Add the directory in which GUF.EXE resides (ie; the 
                    directory that you installed GUF into), to your 
                    search PATH,
        
        or;     2.  Place a GUF.BAT file, that calls GUF.EXE, in any
                    directory in your search PATH.
        
        The diference between these two methods, is that the first 
        method involves editing the search PATH defined in your
        AUTOEXEC.BAT file, and the second method (usually) does NOT.
        
        Since, in my opinion, having to edit your AUTOEXEC.BAT file to 
        install a new program really sucks, we recommend that you avoid 
        the first method, and USE THE SECOND METHOD INSTEAD.
        
        Both methods work equally well, however, and are described 
        separately, and in more detail, below.
        
        ================================================================
                           WHAT IS THE "SEARCH PATH"?
        ================================================================
        
        Before describing the two methods of setting-up MS-DOS, so that 
        you can start GUF with "GUF <Enter>", we'll first give a little 
        background on the MS-DOS search PATH.
        
        (The search PATH is important, no matter which method you use.)
        
        The MS-DOS search PATH, is a text string, that contains the 
        names of the directory(s) that MS-DOS is to search for program 
        files, if it cannot find the requested program in the current 
        MS-DOS working directory.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 34 of 202

        The PATH string is stored in memory (as an MS-DOS "environment 
        variable"), and can be put there with either the:-
        
                        PATH
        or the;         SET
        
        command.
        
        For example:-
        
                PATH c:\                Creates a search PATH with just 
                                        one directory, the root 
                                        directory of drive C.
        
                SET path=c:\;c:\guf1c   Creates a search PATH with two
                                        directorys; the root directory 
                                        of drive C, and; C:\GUF1C\.
        
        To avoid having to manually enter the search PATH, every time 
        you start your computer, it is commonplace to define the search 
        PATH in the AUTOEXEC.BAT file (that is executed every time that 
        the computer starts).
        
        ================================================================
                      FINDING OUT WHAT YOUR SEARCH PATH IS
        ================================================================
        
        To find out, from the MS-DOS prompt, what your search PATH is, 
        EITHER:-
        
                1.  Type:-
        
                        PATH <Enter>
        
                    This will display the CURRENT (MEMORY-RESIDENT) 
                    search PATH.
        
        OR;     2.  Type:-
        
                        TYPE d:\AUTOEXEC.BAT | MORE <Enter>
        
                    NOTE!  Replace the "d" (in the "d:\AUTOEXEC.BAT" 
                           shown above), with the drive letter of the 
                           drive from which MS-DOS was booted.
        
                    This will display the DEFAULT search PATH.
        
                    NOTE!  The DEFAULT search PATH is that defined - 
                           using either the PATH command or the SET 
                           command - in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.)
        
        These methods are described separately, below.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 35 of 202

        ================================================================
              DISPLAYING THE CURRENT (MEMORY-RESIDENT) SEARCH PATH
        ================================================================
        
        To display the current (memory-resident) search PATH (from the 
        MS-DOS prompt), type:-
        
                PATH <Enter>
        
        MS-DOS will then display the current (memory resident) search 
        PATH.
        
        For example, on an MS-DOS (Version 4.01) system, you might see:-
        
                C:\>path
                PATH=C:\;C:\DOS
        
        And on a Windows 95 system, you might see:-
        
                C:\WINDOWS>path
                PATH=C:\WINDOWS;C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND
        
        Thus, the MS-DOS search PATH contains two directorys:-
                C:\
        and;    C:\DOS\
        
        And the Windows 95 search PATH also contains two directorys:-
                C:\WINDOWS\
        and;    C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND\
        
        ================================================================
              DISPLAYING THE SEARCH PATH DEFINED IN "AUTOEXEC.BAT"
        ================================================================
        
        In MS-DOS systems (including those run in DOS boxes, under 
        Windows), it is conventional to define the search PATH in the 
        AUTOEXEC.BAT file that is run when MS-DOS is booted.
        
        (Defining the search PATH in this way, eliminates the need to 
        manually type it in from the keyboard, every time you start your 
        computer.)
        
        To view this default search PATH (from the MS-DOS prompt), 
        type:-
        
                TYPE d:\AUTOEXEC.BAT | MORE <Enter>
        
                NOTES!
        
                1.  Replace the "d" (in the "d:\AUTOEXEC.BAT" shown 
                    above), with the drive letter of the drive from 
                    which MS-DOS was booted.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 36 of 202

                2.  The "| MORE" (in the "TYPE d:\AUTOEXEC.BAT | MORE 
                    <Enter>" shown above), is OPTIONAL.  Use it if; a) 
                    the AUTOEXEC.BAT files takes more than 1 screen to 
                    list, and; b) the search PATH is NOT defined on the 
                    last screen.
        
        For example, on an MS-DOS (Version 4.01) system, you might see:-
        
                C:\>type c:\autoexec.bat
                PATH C:\;C:\DOS
                PROMPT $p$g
        
        And on a Windows 95 system, you might see:-
        
                C:\WINDOWS>type c:\autoexec.bat
                SET PATH=C:\WINDOWS;C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND
        
        Thus, the default MS-DOS search PATH contains two directorys:-
                C:\
        and;    C:\DOS\
        
        And the default Windows 95 search PATH also contains two 
        directorys:-
                C:\WINDOWS\
        and;    C:\WINDOWS\COMMAND\
        
        ================================================================
           SELECTING A DIRECTORY FOR "GUF.BAT" FROM YOUR SEARCH PATH
        ================================================================
        
        The directory that you place GUF.BAT in, can be any directory in 
        your search PATH.
        
        But NOTE that the search PATH from which the directory comes, 
        must be the search PATH that is current (memory-resident), WHEN 
        GUF IS RUN.
        
        In most cases, this will be the same as the default search PATH, 
        defined in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
        
        However, the default search PATH can be overridden, by, for 
        example:-
        
                -  The PATH and SET commands, used (interactively) from 
                   the MS-DOS prompt,
        
                -  The PATH and SET commands, used in *.BAT files,
        
                -  Application programs that change the PATH 
                   "environment variable" in memory.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 37 of 202

        Obviously, YOU have to ensure that; no matter what search PATH 
        is defined in your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, and; no matter how that 
        search PATH is manipulated by subsequent PATH/SET commands or 
        application programs, the search PATH that is current 
        (memory-resident) when GUF is run, contains the directory into 
        which you installed GUF.
        
        ================================================================
            METHOD 1 - ADDING THE GUF DIRECTORY TO YOUR SEARCH PATH
        ================================================================
        
        (We recommend that you AVOID this method; see below.)
        
        To add the directory in which GUF.EXE resides to your search 
        PATH, you'll need to edit your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.
        
        NOTE!  The AUTOEXEC.BAT file lives in the ROOT directory, of the 
               drive from which MS-DOS was booted.  This is usually 
               drive C.
        
        You'll need to edit AUTOEXEC.BAT with a text editor.
        
        If AUTOEXEC.BAT does NOT have a PATH command, append the 
        following line to it:-
        
                PATH C:\GUF1C
        
                NOTE!  If you installed GUF into a directory other than 
                       C:\GUF1C\, replace C:\GUF1C with the name of the
                       directory that you installed GUF into.
        
        If AUTOEXEC.BAT does have an existing PATH command, append the 
        following to it:-
        
                ;C:\GUF1C
        
                For example, if your AUTOEXEC.BAT file contains:-
        
                        SET PATH=C:\;C:\DOS;C:\WINDOWS
        
                then add ";C:\GUF1C" to that line, to get:-
        
                        SET PATH=C:\;C:\DOS;C:\WINDOWS;C:\GUF1C
                                                      ^^^^^^^^^-- added
        
                NOTE!  If you installed GUF into a directory other than 
                       C:\GUF1C\, replace C:\GUF1C with the name of the
                       directory that you installed GUF into.
        
        Once you've edited your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, you'll have to REBOOT 
        your computer, before the changes you have made will take 
        effect.

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 38 of 202

                                     NOTE!
                                     =====
        
        WE DON'T RECOMMEND THAT YOU USE THIS METHOD - OF ADDING THE NAME 
        OF THE DIRECTORY IN WHICH GUF.EXE RESIDES TO YOUR SEARCH PATH - 
        BECAUSE:-
        
        1.  It involves editing your AUTOEXEC.BAT file.  And having to 
            edit your AUTOEXEC.BAT file, to install (and un-install) 
            programs, really sucks!
        
        2.  Adding directorys to your PATH like this, gets really messy.  
            The PATH is not easy to maintain, and can become cluttered 
            with directory names, some of which you may no longer even 
            use.
        
        So, a better method of forcing MS-DOS to start GUF, when you 
        type "GUF <Enter>", is to install the GUF.BAT file, as described 
        below.
        
        ================================================================
               METHOD 2 - INSTALLING THE SUPPLIED "GUF.BAT" FILE
        ================================================================
        
        (This is the recommended method.)
        
        To install the GUF.BAT file:-
        
                1.  COPY the GUF.BAT file (supplied with the GUF
                    Shareware distribution archive), to any directory in 
                    your search PATH,
        
        then;   2.  If you installed GUF into a directory other than 
                    C:\GUF1C\, REPLACE the "C:\GUF1C" in the copied
                    GUF.BAT, WITH THE DETAILS OF THE DRIVE AND DIRECTORY
                    INTO WHICH YOU INSTALLED GUF.
        
        NOTES!
        
        1.  To see what your search PATH is - so that you can select a 
            directory therefrom to copy GUF.BAT into - see the section 
            entitled "FINDING OUT WHAT YOUR "SEARCH PATH" IS", above.
        
        2.  If there is NO directory, in your search PATH, into which 
            you want to place GUF.BAT, you are going to have to select 
            another directory to place GUF.BAT into, and append that 
            directory to your search PATH.
        
            See the section entitled "METHOD 1 - ADDING THE GUF 
            DIRECTORY TO YOUR SEARCH PATH", above, for details of how to 
            do this.  (And remember, when installing GUF.BAT, it's the 
            directory in which GUF.BAT resides, not the directory in 
            which GUF.EXE resides, that you are adding to the search 
            PATH.)

        Chapter 4: Installing GUF ----------------------- Page 39 of 202

        ================================================================
                         CREATING A NEW "GUF.BAT" FILE
        ================================================================
        
        If your copy of GUF does NOT include the default GUF.BAT file, 
        then you can create your own, by using your text editor to 
        create the following, 1-line, *.BAT file:-
        
                C:\GUF1C\GUF.EXE %1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9
        
        Call this file GUF.BAT, and place it in any directory in your 
        PATH (we suggest the ROOT directory of your main hard drive).
        
        NOTES!
        
        1.  The above assumes that GUF was installed into C:\GUF1C\.  If
            you installed GUF into some other directory, replace 
            C:\GUF1C accordingly.
        
        2.  Note also the "%1 %2 %3 %4 %5 %6 %7 %8 %9".  DON'T LEAVE 
            THESE OUT.  (If you do, any command-line parameters that you 
            give to GUF.BAT, will NOT be passed on the GUF.EXE; and 
            GUF.EXE won't do as you instruct.)
        
        3.  If you are installing GUF onto a hard drive, then we suggest 
            that you place GUF.BAT in the ROOT directory of that hard 
            drive.
        
        4.  Whichever directory you place GUF.BAT in, that directory 
            MUST be in your search PATH.  If it's NOT, you'll have to 
            append the directory in which GUF.BAT resides, to your 
            search PATH.
        
            See the section entitled "METHOD 1 - ADDING THE GUF 
            DIRECTORY TO YOUR SEARCH PATH", above, for details of how to 
            do this.  (And remember, when creating GUF.BAT, it's the 
            directory in which GUF.BAT resides, not the directory in 
            which GUF.EXE resides, that you are adding to the search 
            PATH.)

        Chapter 5: Starting GUF ------------------------- Page 40 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 5                          ##
        ##			  STARTING GUF			      ##
        ################################################################
        
        This chapter describes how to start GUF - from either MS-DOS - 
        or Windows 95 - once you've installed it.
        
        ================================================================
           STARTING GUF - FROM THE (MS-DOS OR WINDOWS) MS-DOS PROMPT
        ================================================================
        
        To start GUF, from MS-DOS (or a Windows MS-DOS prompt), type 
        EITHER:-
        
                GUF <Enter>             This will only work if EITHER:-
                                          -  You're in the directory 
                                             into which GUF was 
                                             installed, OR;
                                          -  You've added the directory 
                                             into which GUF was 
                                             installed to your search 
                                             PATH, OR;
                                          -  You've placed a GUF.BAT 
                                             file - that calls GUF.EXE, 
                                             no matter which drive or 
                                             directory GUF.EXE is in - 
                                             into a directory in your 
                                             search PATH.
        
        OR:-
        
                C:\GUF1C\GUF <Enter>    This will always work - though
                                        it assumes you know which
                                        directory GUF was installed into 
                                        (in this example; C:\GUF1C\).
        
        OR:-
        
                C:        <Enter>       This will always work - though
                CD \GUF1C <Enter>       it assumes you know which
                GUF       <Enter>       directory GUF was installed into
                                        (in this example; C:\GUF1C\).
        
        The last two methods assume that you installed GUF into 
        C:\GUF1C\.  If you installed GUF onto another drive and/or
        directory, then substitute the appropriate drive letter and/or 
        directory name, for the drive letter ("C") and/or directory name 
        ("GUF1C") used in these examples.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        GUF does have a COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX - which is somewhat similar 
        to that of the MS-DOS DIR command.

        Chapter 5: Starting GUF ------------------------- Page 41 of 202

        The syntax allows you to (amongst other things):-
        
        	a)  SPECIFY THE DRIVE, AND/OR DIRECTORY (TREE), that you 
        	    would like to start searching (for graphic files,) 
        	    from,
        
        and;	b)  SPECIFY an optionally wildcarded FILENAME.EXT (in 
        	    other words, THE "MATCHING FILES"), that you would 
        	    like GUF to search for.
        
        If you DON'T specify a drive and/or directory on the 
        command-line, GUF will first search (for graphic files) in the 
        CURRENT MS-DOS WORKING DIRECTORY.
        
        And, if the current MS-DOS working directory is a drive ROOT 
        directory, then GUF will set tree mode ON, and search the entire 
        drive (for graphic files).  If the current MS-DOS working 
        directory is NOT a drive ROOT directory, then GUF will set tree 
        mode OFF, and search the current MS-DOS working directory only.
        
        The command-line syntax allows you to override these defaults.
        
        See the Chapter entitled "COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX", for more details 
        of this.
        
        ================================================================
        		 STARTING GUF - FROM WINDOWS 95
        ================================================================
        
        To start GUF, from Windows 95, use ANY of the Windows 95 
        supported methods of running an MS-DOS program.
        
        The FOUR most common of these methods, are described 
        (separately) below.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        Windows 95 allows you to run MS-DOS programs in either:-
        	-  A DOS box,
        or;	-  Pure MS-DOS mode.
        
        When you run an MS-DOS program in a Windows 95 DOS box, the 
        program is run as a Windows 95 task, along with any other 
        Windows 95 tasks that might also be running.
        
        When you run an MS-DOS program in Windows 95 MS-DOS mode, 
        Windows 95 is no longer running.  Instead, you are running a 
        Windows 95 version of the MS-DOS operating system, with NONE of 
        the Windows 95 features or facilties available.
        
        GUF will run in EITHER:-
        	-  The Windows 95 DOS box,
        OR;	-  Windows 95 MS-DOS mode.

        Chapter 5: Starting GUF ------------------------- Page 42 of 202

        GUF works EXACTLY the same in both cases, EXCEPT AS REGARDS 
        SPEED.  GUF runs a zillion times faster in a Windows 95 DOS box, 
        than it does in Windows 95 MS-DOS mode.
        
        (This is especially true of disk I/O; which GUF does a lot of.)
        
        So, WE STRONGLY RECOMMEND THAT YOU RUN GUF, IN A WINDOWS 95 DOS
        BOX.
        
        (There is NO benefit to be gained from running GUF in Windows 95 
        MS-DOS mode.  It works exactly the same, just slower.)
        
        ================================================================
               STARTING GUF - FROM THE WINDOWS 95 "PROGRAMS" MENU
        ================================================================
        
        If you've installed GUF onto the Windows 95 "Programs" menu, you
        can run it as follows:-
        
        1.  Go to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        2.  Click on "Start" (or press the Windows key).
        
        3.  The "Windows 95" menu will pop-up.
        
            Click on "Programs" (or press P twice, and then Enter).
        
        4.  The "Programs" menu (*) will pop-up.
        
            Click on "GUF" (or press DownArrow, until you get to "GUF",
            then press Enter).
        
        GUF will now start and run.
        
        This method is the quickest and simplest method of starting GUF 
        from Windows 95.  And it launches GUF into a DOS box - for high 
        speed operation.
        
        However, you cannot use it, unless you first install GUF onto 
        the Windows 95 "Programs" menu - as described in the Chapter
        entitled "INSTALLING GUF".
        
        (*)  The "Programs" menu is not actually labelled.  But it's the 
             menu that pops-up when you click on "Start" and then 
             "Programs" - and that lists a whole load of programs that 
             you can run.

        Chapter 5: Starting GUF ------------------------- Page 43 of 202

        ================================================================
                 STARTING GUF - FROM THE WINDOWS 95 "RUN" MENU
        ================================================================
        
        If you know the drive and directory in which GUF is installed, 
        you can start GUF as follows:-
        
        1.  Go to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        2.  Click on "Start".
        
        3.  The "Windows 95" menu will pop-up.
        
            Click on "Run" (or press R).
        
        4.  The "Run" menu will pop-up.
        
            Type:-
                C:\GUF1C\GUF.EXE
            (*) into the "Open" field.
        
            Then click on "OK" (or press Enter).
        
        GUF will now start and run.
        
        This method launches GUF in a DOS box  - for high speed 
        operation.
        
        However, it does require that you know - are prepared to search 
        for - the drive and directory that you installed GUF into.
        
        But, if you've just installed GUF, and know that information, 
        this might be the method to use.  Especially if you're just 
        evaluating GUF (and don't want to install it onto the Windows 95 
        "Programs" menu, just yet).
        
        (*)  This example assumes that you installed GUF into C:\GUF1C\.
             If you installed GUF onto another drive and/or directory, 
             then substitute the appropriate drive letter and/or 
             directory name, for the drive letter ("C") and/or directory 
             name ("GUF1C") typed into the "Open" field.
        
        ================================================================
            STARTING GUF - FROM THE WINDOWS 95 DOS BOX MS-DOS PROMPT
        ================================================================
        
        To run GUF from the MS-DOS prompt, in a Windows 95 DOS box:-
        
        1.  Go to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        2.  Click on "Start".
        
        3.  The "Windows 95" menu will pop-up.
        
            Click on "Programs" (or press P twice, then press Enter).

        Chapter 5: Starting GUF ------------------------- Page 44 of 202

        4.  The "Programs" menu (*) will pop-up.
        
            Click on "MS-DOS Prompt" (or press DownArrow, until you get 
            to "MS-DOS Prompt", then press Enter).
        
        5.  Windows 95 will then launch MS-DOS, in a DOS box.
        
            Typically, you'll see the following, at the top left of an 
            otherwise black screen:-
        
                Microsoft(R) Windows 95
                   (C)Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981-1996.
        
                C:\WINDOWS>
        
        6.  You should now continue, as described in the section 
            entitled "STARTING GUF - FROM THE (MS-DOS OR WINDOWS) MS-DOS 
            PROMPT", above.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        If you want to run GUF, from the MS-DOS prompt, under Windows
        95, this is BEST METHOD to use.  GUF runs MUCH faster in a
        Windows 95 DOS box, than it does in Windows 95 MS-DOS mode.
        
        ================================================================
                 STARTING GUF - FROM WINDOWS 95 IN MS-DOS MODE
        ================================================================
        
        To run GUF from the MS-DOS prompt, in Windows 95 MS-DOS mode:-
        
        1.  Go to the Windows 95 desktop.
        
        2.  Click on "Start".
        
        3.  The "Windows 95" menu will pop-up.
        
            Click on "Shut Down" (or press U).
        
        4.  The "Shut Down Windows" menu will pop-up.
        
            Click on "Restart the computer in MS-DOS mode?" (or press M).
        
        5.  Windows 95 will shut down, and the computer will re-boot 
            under MS-DOS.
        
            Typically, you'll get a whole series of start-up messages, 
            followed by the MS-DOS prompt, at the bottom left of the 
            screen:-
        
                Microsoft(R) Windows 95
                   (C)Copyright Microsoft Corp 1981-1996.
        
                C:\WINDOWS>

        Chapter 5: Starting GUF ------------------------- Page 45 of 202

        6.  You should now continue, as described in the section 
            entitled "STARTING GUF - FROM THE (MS-DOS OR WINDOWS) MS-DOS 
            PROMPT", above.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        If you want to run GUF, from the MS-DOS prompt, under Windows 
        95, this is NOT the best method to use.  GUF runs MUCH faster in 
        a Windows 95 DOS box, than it does in Windows 95 MS-DOS mode.

        Chapter 6: Command-Line Syntax ------------------ Page 46 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 6                          ##
        ##                    COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX                     ##
        ################################################################
        
        ================================================================
                            THE COMMAND LINE SYNTAX
        ================================================================
        
        GUF is a menu-driven program.  So, you NORMALLY run it (from the 
        MS-DOS prompt), by typing:-
        
                GUF <Enter>
        
        But, GUF also accepts the following command line parameters:-
        
                GUF  [file/dir]  [/M]  [/W]  [/T]  <Enter>
        
        These parameters are all OPTIONAL.  They can be used to specify 
        any or all of the following:-
        
                a)  A DIRECTORY - or DIRECTORY TREE - for GUF to
                    search (for "wanted" and "matching" files),
                    at start-up.
        
                b)  The "MATCHING FILES" - that GUF is to search for 
                    (both at start-up, and subsequently).
        
                c)  Toggles the initial value of the "INCLUDE MATCHING 
                    FILES?" flag OFF,
        
                d)  Toggles the initial value of the "INCLUDE WANTED
                    FILES?" flag OFF,
        
        and;    d)  Toggles the initial value of the "TREE MODE?" flag:-
                        OFF:  If the initial "SEARCH root directory" is 
                              a DRIVE root directory
                         ON:  If the initial "SEARCH root directory" is 
                              NOT a DRIVE root directory
        
        The parameters are described separately, below.

        Chapter 6: Command-Line Syntax ------------------ Page 47 of 202

        ================================================================
                                   "FILE/DIR"
        ================================================================
        
        "File/dir" MUST be a valid MS-DOS file or directory name - and 
        MAY EITHER:-
        
                a)  Contain wildcards ("?" and "*"),
        
        OR;     b)  Be an "ancestor requestor":-
                        -  "."   = the current directory
                        -  ".."  = the parent of the current directory
                        -  "..." = the grand-parent of the current 
                                   directory,
                        -  and so on.
        
        "File/dir" can specify either a FILE or a DIRECTORY.
        
        If "file/dir" specifies a DIRECTORY:-
                That directory becomes the initial "SEARCH root
                directory".
        
        If "file/dir" specifies a FILE:-
                A)  The FILENAME.EXT part, defines the "MATCHING" files 
                    that GUF is to search for (both at start-up, and 
                    subsequently),
        
        and;    B)  The DIRECTORY\ part, defines the initial "SEARCH
                    root directory".
        
        If NO "file/dir" is specified on the command line, the "SEARCH 
        root directory" DEFAULTS to the CURRENT MS-DOS WORKING 
        DIRECTORY.
        
        "File/dir" allows you to override this fault, and search for 
        "wanted" and/or "matching" files, on the drive, and/or in the 
        directory, of your choice.
        
        For example:-
        
                C:\WINDOWS> GUF <Enter>
                        NO file/dir was specified on the command-line. 
                        The initial "SEARCH root directory" is 
                        C:\WINDOWS\.
        
                C:\WINDOWS\ GUF ART <Enter>
                        The file/dir "ART" was specified on the 
                        command-line.  Assuming that C:\WINDOWS\ has a 
                        sub-directory called ART, the initial "SEARCH 
                        root directory" is C:\WINDOWS\ART\.

        Chapter 6: Command-Line Syntax ------------------ Page 48 of 202

                C:\WINDOWS\ GUF A:\ <Enter>
                        The file/dir "A:\" was specified on the 
                        command-line.  The initial "SEARCH root 
                        directory" is A:\.
        
                C:\WINDOWS\ GUF C:\*.GFX <Enter>
                        The file/dir "C:\*.GFX" was specified on the 
                        command-line.  The MATCHING files are *.GFX 
                        files, and the initial "SEARCH root directory" 
                        is C:\.
        
                C:\WINDOWS\ GUF .. <Enter>
                        The file/dir ".." was specified on the 
                        command-line.  The initial "SEARCH root 
                        directory" is C:\.
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "/M" SWITCH
        ================================================================
        
        The "INCLUDE MATCHING FILES" flag DEFAULTS ON, at start-up.
        
        The "/M" switch allows you to set the "INCLUDE MATCHING FILES" 
        flag initially OFF.
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "/W" SWITCH
        ================================================================
        
        The "INCLUDE WANTED FILES" flag DEFAULTS ON, at start-up.
        
        The "/W" switch allows you to set the "INCLUDE WANTED FILES" 
        flag initially OFF.
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "/T" SWITCH
        ================================================================
        
        Toggles the initial "tree mode" setting.
        
        At start-up, GUF first determines the "root directory", for the 
        start-up search.  It then sets "tree mode":-
        
                ON  - If the initial SEARCH root directory is a DRIVE 
                      root directory
        
                OFF - If it is NOT.
        
        The /T switch, toggles this initial "tree mode" setting; leaving 
        "tree mode":-
        
                OFF - If the initial SEARCH root directory is a DRIVE
                      root directory
        
                ON  - If it is NOT.

        Chapter 7: Running GUF -------------------------- Page 49 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 7                          ##
        ##                        RUNNING GUF                         ##
        ################################################################
        
        ================================================================
                             MENU DRIVEN OPERATION
        ================================================================
        
        GUF is a MENU DRIVEN program.
        
        So, once you've started it, you perform most operations, by 
        selecting the appropriate options from menus and pop-up boxes.
        
        However, there are some basic functions - like page turning, for 
        example - that are performed by pressing key(s).
        
        The keys used, are described in more detail, below.
        
        ================================================================
                      KEYBOARD OPERATION ONLY (NO MOUSE!)
        ================================================================
        
        GUF accepts user input from the KEYBOARD, ONLY.  It does NOT 
        require (or use) a mouse.
        
        ================================================================
                               COMMONLY USED KEYS
        ================================================================
        
        The most commonly used keys, are:-
        
                /         =  Menu
                /Q        =  Quit
        
                [         =  Go to the FIRST    page
                <         =  Go to the PREVIOUS page
                >         =  Go to the NEXT     page
                ]         =  Go to the LAST     page
        
                Esc       = Nest UP  , to next higher level
                Enter     = Nest DOWN, to next lower  level
        
                Backspace = Go to the PREVIOUS view
                Tab       = Go to the NEXT     view
        
        See the Chapters that describe each "level", for a more complete 
        description of these keys.

        Chapter 7: Running GUF -------------------------- Page 50 of 202

        ================================================================
                                 FUNCTION KEYS
        ================================================================
        
        The program also use the "Function" keys; F1 to F10.
        
        These are sometimes used alone, and sometimes in combination 
        with the Shift, Ctrl and Alt keys.  Ie;
        
                     Alone;        F1 ,       F2 , etc
                  with Alt;    Alt+F1 ,   Alt+F2 , etc
                 with Ctrl;   Ctrl+F1 ,  Ctrl+F2 , etc
                with Shift;  Shift+F1 , Shift+F2 , etc
        
        ================================================================
                           FINDING THE KEY(S) TO USE
        ================================================================
        
        Although GUF uses lots of keys, this is NOT a problem, because a 
        listing of the keys used can be obtained at any point in the 
        program.
        
        The key listings available, depend on the level, as follows:-
        
                LEVEL 1: "DRIVES"
        AND;    LEVEL 2: "WANTED FILES"
        
                        These levels use so FEW keys, that they are ALL 
                        listed on-screen (in particular, on the 2-line 
                        FOOTER, that appears at the bottom of each 
                        level's main screen).
        
                LEVEL 3: "DIRECTORYS"
                LEVEL 4: "FILES (STATS ONLY)"
        AND;    LEVEL 5: "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)"
        
                        These levels use HEAPS of keys.
        
                        The MAIN keys are listed on the 2-line footer, 
                        that appears at the bottom of the level's main 
                        screen.
        
                        In addition ALL the keys used by the level, are 
                        listed on a multi-page pop-up "KEY SUMMARY".  To 
                        view this "Key Summary", press /K, from the 
                        level's main screen.

        Chapter 7: Running GUF -------------------------- Page 51 of 202

                LEVEL 6: "FULL-SCREEN (SHORTS)"
        AND;    LEVEL 7: "FULL-SCREEN (ORIGINALS)"
        
                        These levels use LOTS of keys too (though not as 
                        many as Levels 3 to 5).
        
                        The keys used, however, are ALL listed on the 
                        various POP-UP boxes, that can be activated on 
                        these levels.
        
                        So, to find out the keys used for a particular 
                        function:-
        
                                        -  Press /, to activate the
                                           level's MAIN MENU,
        
                        and then;       -  Enable the POP-UP box that
                                           corresponds to that function 
                                           whhose keys are required.
        
                        For example, to find out the keys used to switch 
                        VIDEO MODES, enable the "Video Modes" box.

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 52 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 8                          ##
        ##                   TEST DRIVE & TUTORIAL                    ##
        ################################################################
        
        This Chapter gives an overview, of starting and using GUF.
        
        It concentrates on the screens that you are likely to encounter, 
        when you first start using GUF.
        
        ================================================================
                        USING THIS CHAPTER AS A TUTORIAL
        ================================================================
        
        The example screen dumps, given in this Chapter, assume that the 
        CURRENT MS-DOS WORKING DIRECTORY:-
        
                a)  Is called C:\GUF1C\,
        
        and;    b)  Contains the two sample graphic files:-
        
                          BARTCLR.GIF
                    and;  SAMPLE.JPG,
        
                    included in the GUF Shareware distribution archive
                    (GUF1C.ZIP).
        
        If you ENSURE that the directory you start GUF with contains 
        those two sample graphic files - then you will be able to work 
        through the examples given - and treat this Chapter as a 
        TUTORIAL, on how to start and use GUF.
        
        ================================================================
                                THE INITIAL SCREEN
        ================================================================
        
        When GUF is first started, it will:-
        
                        a)  SEARCH for graphic files in the directory 
                            (tree) you specified at the command line,
        
        and then;       b)  Drop into the "Files (Stats Only)" level, to 
                            LIST the files (if any,) that were found.
        
        Thus, the first screen you see, will look something like:-

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 53 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |	       Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)	       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |     GIFs & Common Non-GIFs From C:\GUF1C\ (DIR ONLY)     | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                              |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |  1  C:\GUF1C\              2 of 2 wanted/matching files  | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |    2   BARTCLR.GIF   640w 350h  16 colours       9,344 bytes |
        |    3   SAMPLE.JPG    Not GIF (Bad signature)    52,767 bytes |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp		       /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        This screen provides a 1 line per file listing - rather like 
        that of the MS-DOS DIR command.
        
        However, the listing is graphic file oriented - with each line 
        showing the file's FILENAME.EXT, and SIZE (in pixels, colours 
        and bytes).  
        
        ================================================================
                     OTHER WAYS OF VIEWING THE FILES FOUND
        ================================================================
        
        GUF provides MORE THAN ONE way of viewing the files that were
        found.
        
        It allows you to view the files found, and other related 
        information, on SEVEN "levels":-
        
                Level 1  =  DRIVES                        |      /^\
                Level 2  =  WANTED FILES                  |       |
                Level 3  =  DIRECTORYS                    |       |
        -->     Level 4  =  FILES (STATS ONLY)         (Enter)  (Esc)
                Level 5  =  FILES (STATS & PICTURES)      |       |
                Level 6  =  FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)          |       |
                Level 7  =  FULL SCREEN (ORIGINALS)      \_/      |
        
        Each level is, in effect, a separate little program, that allows 
        you to view the files found, or other related information, in 
        it's own unique format.
        
        You move through these levels, by using the Enter and Esc keys.  
        Enter nests you DOWN; Esc nests you UP.

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 54 of 202

        GUF STARTS at the "Files (Stats Only)" level.  To VIEW the
        file's, you will need to NEST DOWN, to one of the lower levels.
        
        See the Chapter entitled "A QUICK TOUR" - for more information 
        on the levels, and the information that they provide.
        
        If you are using this Chapter as a TUTORIAL, we also recommend 
        that you now FAMILIARISE YOURSELF WITH THE LEVELS, by using 
        Enter and Esc, to move down and up though them.
        
        ================================================================
                          WHAT IF NO FILES ARE FOUND?
        ================================================================
        
        If the directory (tree) that you started GUF with, contained NO 
        graphic files, then the first screen that you see will contain 
        the "No Wanted Or Matching Files" message:-
        
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |      NO WANTED OR MATCHING FILES      |
                   |  -----------------------------------  |
                   |  There are NO "wanted" or "matching"  |
                   |  files, in the currently selected     |
                   |  directory (tree) .  Suggestions...   |
                   |  * Press /FL                          |
                   |      To SELECT ANOTHER DIRECTORY      |
                   |      (TREE) to search (and LOAD).     |
                   |  * Press Esc TWICE                    |
                   |      To SELECT ANOTHER SET OF         |
                   |      "WANTED FILES" (FILENAME.EXTs),  |
                   |      to search for.                   |
                   |  * Press Esc THREE Times              |
                   |      To SELECT ANOTHER DRIVE.         |
                   +---------------------------------------+
        
        Follow the instructions it gives, on how to locate some graphic 
        files to view.
        
                                     HINT!
                                     -----
        The fastest way to determine whether or not the currently 
        selected DRIVE contains any graphic files, is to use the FIRST 
        suggestion made by the "No Wanted Or Matching Files" box.
        
        In other words, press /FL (to invoke the "Find And Load Files" 
        option).
        
        If you do so, a box like the following will pop-up:-

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 55 of 202

             +----------------------------------------------------+
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |             The currently loaded             |  |
             |  |         wanted & matching files are          |  |
             |  |            GIFs & Common Non-GIFs            |  |
             |  |                     From                     |  |
             |  |              C:\XXX\ (DIR ONLY)              |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |           Which directory (tree)'s           |  |
             |  |            GIFs & Common Non-GIFs            |  |
             |  |           do you want to LOAD now?           |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  1  SAME       - TREE                        |  |
             |  |                                              |  |
             |  |  2  PARENT     - DIRECTORY ONLY              |  |
             |  |  3  PARENT     - TREE                        |  |
             |  |                                              |  |
             |  |  4  DRIVE ROOT - DIRECTORY ONLY              |  |
             |  |  5  DRIVE ROOT - TREE                        |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +-------------+  +----------+  +---------------+  |
             |  | W=+/-Wanted |  | Esc=Quit |  | M=+/-Matching |  |
             |  +-------------+  +----------+  +---------------+  |
             +----------------------------------------------------+
        
        Now, select option 5.  This will force GUF to search the ENTIRE 
        DISK for graphic files.
        
        ================================================================
                         CREATING "LONGS" FOR NON-GIFS
        ================================================================
        
        GUF will DIRECTLY display GIF files only.  Graphic files in 
        other formats can STILL be displayed, but you must create
        "LONGS" for them first.
        
        NOTE!  A "LONG" is a same-size copy, in GIF format, of a 
               (non-GIF) source file.  "LONGS" are the means by which 
               GUF displays graphic files other than GIFs.  They allow 
               GUF to display the wide variety of graphic file formats 
               supported by Image Alchemy.
        
        The two sample graphic files, included in the GUF Shareware 
        distribution archive (GUF1C.ZIP), are:-
        
                BARTCLR.GIF
        and;    SAMPLE.JPG.
        
        BARTCLR.GIF is a GIF; so it can be displayed as it is.  But, 
        SAMPLE.JPG is a JPEG; so we must create a Long for it, first.

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 56 of 202

        To create a Long for SAMPLE.JPG:-
        
        Firstly; select either:-
                the "FILES (STATS ONLY)" level,
        or;     the "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" level.
        
        Then; press /L (to invoke the Main Menu's "Longs" option).
        
        The "Longs" box will be displayed:-
        
        +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                   +--------------------------+                  |
        |         +---------+  View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk  +--------+         |
        |         |  GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer  |         |
        |         +---+  Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)  +---+         |
        |             +-------------------------------------+             |
        |                                                                 |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |                            LONGS                            | |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                                 |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | C:\GUF1C\                                                   | |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | 1   BARTCLR.GIF   640w 350h  16colours          9,344 bytes | |
        | |                                                             | |
        | | 2   SAMPLE.JPG    Not GIF (Bad signature)      52,767 bytes | |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                                 |
        +--------------------+-------------------------------+------------+
        |    Page 1 of 1     |        F5=*GraphicsMode       |  F8=*Tick  |
        |   [<>]=TurnPage    |  F6=*MenuPalettePreservation  |            |
        |     Esc=Quit       |            F7=*B&W            |  F9=Menu   |
        +--------------------+-------------------------------+------------+
        
        The "Longs" box lists all the graphic files that were found.
        
        The graphic files that are NOT GIFs, and for which "Longs" are 
        required, will be marked with a error message; usually "Not GIF 
        (Bad signature)", in Red.
        
        To create a "long" for SAMPLE.JPG, press 2.  The "What Do You 
        Want To Do With This SOURCE FILE?" box will pop-up:-

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 57 of 202

             +---------------------------------------------------+
             |                     SAMPLE.JPG                    |
             |   What do you want to do with this SOURCE FILE?   |
             | +----------------+ +---------------+ +----------+ |
             | | T=(Toggle)Tick | | C=CreateLongs | | Esc=Quit | |
             | +----------------+ +---------------+ +----------+ |
             +---------------------------------------------------+
        
        Press C, to select the "Create Longs" option.
        
        The "Get Alchemy & RedSwap Directorys" box will then pop-up:-
        
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |             Create longs for             |
                  |                SAMPLE.JPG                |
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |                                          |
                  |  ALCHEMY...                              |
                  |    -  Filename.Ext:  ALCHEMY.EXE         |
                  |    A  ...Directory:  (C:\GUF1C\)         |
                  |                                          |
                  |  FREE (MS-DOS Conventional) MEMORY...    |
                  |    500,000 bytes in 3 blocks             |
                  |    (largest free block = 490,000 bytes)  |
                  |                                          |
                  |  REDSWAP...                              |
                  |    -  Filename.Ext:  REDSWAPM.EXE        |
                  |    R  ...Directory:  (C:\GUF1C\)         |
                  |    U  ....USE? (*):  No                  |
                  |                                          |
                  |  (*) Use RedSwap, if Alchemy fails,      |
                  |      due to lack of memory.              |
                  |                                          |
                  |  Enter=Continue                Esc=Quit  |
                  +------------------------------------------+
        
        Press A, to search for ALCHEMY.EXE.
        
        And, if you want to use RedSwap (you will only need to do so, if 
        Alchemy fails, due to lack of memory):-
                -  Press U, to toggle the use of RedSwap ON,
        then;   -  Press R, to search for REDSWAPM.EXE.
        
        Once you've found Alchemy and RedSwap (if RedSwap is required), 
        press Enter, and the "Start Creating Longs?" box will pop-up:-

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 58 of 202

                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |            START CREATING            |
                    |                  1                   |
                    |             long(s) for              |
                    |              SAMPLE.JPG              |
                    |                                      |
                    |            ARE YOU SURE?             |
                    |                                      |
                    |               WARNING!               |
                    |  This is your last chance to quit.   |
                    |  If you answer Yes, we will begin.   |
                    |                                      |
                    |       +-------+       +------+       |
                    |       | Y=Yes |       | N=No |       |
                    |       +-------+       +------+       |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to create the "Long".
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without creating the "Long".
        
        Once the "Long" has been created, and you exit the "Longs" box, 
        to return to the "Files (Stats Only)" level, the "Files (Stats 
        Only)" level screen will be re-drawn, as follows:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |		     View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk		       |
        |	   GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer	       |
        |	       Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)	       |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |     GIFs & Common Non-GIFs From C:\GUF1C\ (DIR ONLY)     | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                              |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |  1  C:\GUF1C\              2 of 2 wanted/matching files  | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |    2   BARTCLR.GIF   640w 350h  16 colours       9,344 bytes |
        |    3   SAMPLE.JPG    640w 480h 256 colours      52,767 bytes |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp		       /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        In other words, SAMPLE.JPG is now treated the same as 
        BARTCLR.GIF.
        
        The same applies, if you nest down to a lower level to VIEW the 
        graphics.  Whenever, SAMPLE.JPG is to be displayed, it's "Long", 
        which looks exactly the same, will be displayed instead.
        
        So, once you've created a "Long" for a non-GIF file, the fact 
        that the non-GIF file is NOT a GIF file, is invisible to the 
        user.

        Chapter 8: Test Drive & Tutorial ---------------- Page 59 of 202

        ================================================================
                                    "SHORTS"
        ================================================================
        
        A "Short", is a scaled copy of a source file, that fits the 
        screen or window in which it is to be displayed, more or less 
        exactly.
        
        "Shorts" let you eliminate the inconvenience, of having to 
        scroll around graphics that are too big for the screen.
        
        We won't describe "Shorts" any more, in this Test 
        Drive/Tutorial.
        
        ("Shorts are NOT essential to the use of GUF as a graphic file 
        viewer; but they are useful, as a means of making the graphics 
        easier to view.)
        
        See the Chapter entitled "CREATING, SELECTING AND DELETING 
        "SHORTS"", for more details on "Shorts".

        Chapter 9: Concepts & Terminology --------------- Page 60 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 9                          ##
        ##                   CONCEPTS & TERMINOLOGY                   ##
        ################################################################
        
        ================================================================
                                    "LEVELS"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
                                 "VIDEO MODES"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
                                    "FONTS"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
        			  "PLATFORMS"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
                                 "WANTED FILES"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
                                "MATCHING FILES"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
                                    "SHORTS"
        ================================================================
        
        ================================================================
                                    "LONGS"
        ================================================================

        Chapter 10: The "Drives" Level ------------------ Page 61 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 10                         ##
        ##                     THE "DRIVES" LEVEL                     ##
        ################################################################
        
        The "Drives" level:-
        
                a)  LISTS the "drives" available on your PC,
        
        and;    b)  Lets you SELECT any of the drives listed.
        
        This allows you to search for, and view, graphic files, on ANY 
        drive on your PC.
        
        ================================================================
                                 SCREEN LAYOUT
        ================================================================
        
        A typical "Drives" level screen looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |                    Level 1 of 7 - Drives                     |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  A  DRIVE...    Letter:  A                             |  |
        |  |                   Type:  Floppy disk 3.5" 1.44Mb       |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  C  DRIVE...    Letter:  C                             |  |
        |  |                   Type:  Hard disk 500Mb               |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown              F1=ToggleFormat  A-Z=SelectDrive |
        | Page1of2  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  The example screen, shown above, assumes a PC with; 1 x 
               floppy disk drive (A) and; 1 x hard disk drive (C).
        
               Your PC will probably have different drives than this.  
               If it does, the screen you see, will differ accordingly.

        Chapter 10: The "Drives" Level ------------------ Page 62 of 202

        ================================================================
                          OPERATING THE "DRIVES" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Operating the "Drives" level is pretty straight-forward.
        
        The keys used are listed at the bottom of the screen (see 
        above).  Their use should be pretty much self-explanatory.
        
        The main keys to worry about, of course, are the drive selection 
        keys.
        
        Just press "A" to "Z" - the same key as the drive that you want 
        to select.  See below - for more details on this.
        
        ================================================================
                            SELECTING ANOTHER DRIVE
        ================================================================
        
        The currently selected drive is highlighted (in Red).
        
        To SELECT ANOTHER DRIVE, just press it's drive letter; "A" to 
        "Z".
        
        The only (immediate) effect that this will have, is to change to 
        highlight (in Red), to the drive you have just selected.
        
        But, when you nest back down to the "Directorys" level, GUF will 
        detect that you have selected another drive, and then:-
        
                        1.  Set the "root directory" (from which graphic 
                            files are to be loaded), to the selected 
                            drive's root directory,
        
                        2.  Turn "tree mode" OFF (*),
        
        and then;       3.  Reload the wanted/matching files - from the 
                            selected drive's root directory (only).
        
        Once the files have been loaded, you will be dropped into the 
        "Directorys" level proper.  You will then find out whether the 
        selected drive's root directory contains any wanted/matching 
        files, or not.
        
        If it does, you can then nest down to view them, in the normal 
        fashion.
        
        If it does NOT, you can either:-
        
                1.  Press Esc ONCE - to nest back up to the "Wanted 
                    Files" level - and select another set of wanted 
                    files to search for,

        Chapter 10: The "Drives" Level ------------------ Page 63 of 202

                2.  Press Esc TWICE - to nest back up to the "Drives" 
                    level - and select another drive,
        
        or;     3.  Press /FL1 - to turn tree mode ON - and then load 
                    the wanted/matching files again.
        
                    This is generally the most useful option, since it 
                    results in the ENTIRE DISK being searched (for 
                    wanted/matching files).
        
                    That, in turn, lets you know; whether or not the 
                    drive (or the disk it currently contains,) contains 
                    any wanted/matching (graphic) files that you can 
                    view.
        
        (*)  The reason that "tree mode" is initially turned OFF, is 
             that searching a large (eg; 1 Gb) (hard disk) drive can 
             take some time (minutes, rather than seconds) - depending 
             on the "wanted files" that you have requested be searched 
             for.
        
             To start such a search, you will have to press /FL1 - to 
             start the search again, with "tree mode" ON.  We assume 
             that, if you do this, you are prepared to wait.
        
        ================================================================
                               F1 = TOGGLE FORMAT
        ================================================================
        
        The information listed for each drive, is available in three 
        levels of detail.
        
        Level 1 - the DEFAULT - is (for example):-
        
                +------------------------------------------------------+
                |  C  DRIVE...    Letter:  C                           |
                |                   Type:  Hard disk 500Mb             |
                +------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Level 2, is (for example):-
        
                +------------------------------------------------------+
                |  C  DRIVE...     Letter:  C                          |
                |                    Type:  Hard disk 500Mb            |
                |       Current Directory:  \GUF1C\                    |
                |        Remote (on LAN?):  No                         |
                |     MEDIA...                                         |
                |                    Type:                             |
                |            Volume Label:  NO NAME                    |
                |           Serial Number:  123456789                  |
                |                    Size:  200,000,000 bytes free     |
                |                        :  300,000,000 bytes used     |
                |                        :  500,000,000 bytes total    |
                +------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 10: The "Drives" Level ------------------ Page 64 of 202

        Level 3, is (for example):-
        
                +------------------------------------------------------+
                |  C  DRIVE...     Letter:  C                          |
                |                    Type:  Hard disk 500Mb            |
                |       Current Directory:  \GUF1C\                    |
                |        Remote (on LAN?):  No                         |
                |        Removable Media?:  No                         |
                |     MEDIA...                                         |
                |                    Type:                             |
                |            Volume Label:  NO NAME                    |
                |           Serial Number:  123456789                  |
                |                    Size:  200,000,000 bytes free     |
                |                        :  300,000,000 bytes used     |
                |                        :  500,000,000 bytes total    |
                +------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Pressing F1 rotates you through these levels of detail:-
        
                Level 1      TO Level 2,
                Level 2      TO Level 3,
        and;    Level 3 BACK TO to Level 1,
        
        and so on.
        
        NOTE!  As far as using GUF is concerned (to search for and view 
               graphic files), the additional drive information you can 
               get, by pressing F1, is probably of little interest.
        
               But, what the heck; it's there if you want it.
        
        ================================================================
                                TURNING THE PAGE
        ================================================================
        
        The "Drives" level occupies as many pages as are required to 
        list all the drives on your PC.
        
        To move through the pages, use the standard page turning keys:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    page
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS page
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     page
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     page.

        Chapter 10: The "Drives" Level ------------------ Page 65 of 202

        ================================================================
                    CHANGING THE LEVEL (NESTING UP AND DOWN)
        ================================================================
        
        The "Drives" level is level 1.
        
                -->  Level 1  =  Drives
                     Level 2  =  WANTED FILES              (Enter)
                     Level 3  =  Directorys
                     Level 4  =  Files (Stats Only)
                     Level 5  =  Files (Stats & Pictures)
                     Level 6  =  Full Screen (Shorts)
                     Level 7  =  Full Screen (Originals)
        
        Enter nests you down, to the WANTED FILES level.
        
        Esc doesn't work (since there are NO levels above the Drives 
        level).
        
        ================================================================
                               CHANGING THE VIEW
        ================================================================
        
        GUF, version 1c, supports only 1 "View".
        
        So, the view changing keys:-
        
                Backspace  =  Go to the PREVIOUS view
        and;    Tab        =  Go to the NEXT     view,
        
        DON'T WORK.
        
        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        You cannot quit GUF directly from the "Drives" level; you must 
        nest down to the "Directorys" (or any lower) level, and quit 
        from there.
        
        In other words, to quit GUF, from the "Drives" level:-
        
                -  Press Enter TWICE - to nest down to the Directorys 
                                       Level
        
        then;   -  Press /           - to invoke the Main Menu
        
        then;   -  Press Q           - to Quit.
        
        Once you have done this, you will be returned to the program 
        from which you called GUF (usually either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
        or; Windows).

        Chapter 10: The "Drives" Level ------------------ Page 66 of 202

        ================================================================
                      WARNING!  MS-DOS BEFORE VERSION 4.01
        ================================================================
        
        MS-DOS is pretty lousy when it comes to providing information 
        (to application programs,) on the drives you have.  The 
        functions available are very limited - and very 
        version-specific.
        
        I developed and tested the "Drives" level, using MS-DOS Version 
        4.01.  So, it works OK on that version, and SHOULD therefore 
        work OK on any later version (including the versions supplied 
        with Windows).
        
        But if you are using an earlier version of MS-DOS, I have NOT 
        tested the "Drives" level on these - and it wouldn't surprise me 
        if it didn't work too well with them.
        
        If you experience problems, please accept my apologies.
        
        Obviously, if using the "Drives" level on these earlier versions 
        cause a program crash, or the like, you'll probably want to 
        aviod using the "Drives" level.
        
        Fortunately, you can change drives WITHOUT using the "Drives" 
        level.  To do simply QUIT GUF, and then run it again, specifying 
        the drive that you want to search, on the command line.
        
        For example, if you were logged onto drive C - but wanted to 
        search a floppy disk in drive A - you could run GUF as follows:-
        
                GUF a:\ <Enter>
        
        See the Chapter entitled "COMMAND-LINE SYNTAX", for more 
        details.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 67 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 11                         ##
        ##                  THE "WANTED FILES" LEVEL                  ##
        ################################################################
        
        The "Wanted Files" level:-
        
                a)  LISTS the "wanted files" (sets of FILENAME.EXTs,) 
                    that you can search for,
        
        and;    b)  Lets you SELECT any of the wanted file categories 
                    listed.
        
        This allows you to select the (graphic) file format(s) (*.GIF,
        *.JPG, *.BMP, etc), that you want to search for and view.
        
        ================================================================
                             WANTED FILE CATEGORYS
        ================================================================
        
        Eight categories of "wanted files" are supported:-
        
                -  GIFs
                -  GIFs & Common Non-GIFs
        
                -  Common Non-GIFs
                -  Uncommon Non-GIFs
                -  Unlikely Non-GIFs
        
                -  GUF Support Files
                -  Shorts
                -  Longs
        
        These categories are described separately, below.
        
        ================================================================
                                      GIFS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  *.GIF
        
             COMMENTS:  GIFs (and JPGs) are the two de-facto standard 
                        graphic file formats in wide use.  Graphics 
                        distributed via BBS, or on the Internet, for 
                        example, are usually in one of these two 
                        formats.
        
                        Since GUF will display GIFs directly, and since 
                        there may be cases when all the graphics you 
                        want to view will be GIFs, I've created a 
                        separate category for them.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 68 of 202

        ================================================================
                             GIFS & COMMON NON-GIFS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  *.GIF *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF
        
             COMMENTS:  These are the commonly ocurring graphic file 
                        formats, supported by Image Alchemy.
        
                        Most MS-DOS and Windows applications, will 
                        read/write at least one of these formats.  So, 
                        if you search for these files, you should find 
                        most of the graphics on your PC.
        
                                           NOTES!
                                           ------
        
                        1.  There is a difference between the "GIFs" and 
                            the "Common Non-GIFs" in this category.  
                            This difference is that GUF's graphic file 
                            VIEWER will display GIFs only; the other 
                            file formats must be converted to "Longs" 
                            first.
        
                            Thus, "GIFs" and "Common Non-GIFs" must be 
                            handled (slightly) differently.  For this 
                            reason, I've created separate categories for 
                            them ("GIFs" and "Common Non-GIFs"), as well 
                            as this combined category ("GIFs & Common 
                            Non-GIFs").
        
                        2.  "GIFs & Common Non-GIFs" is the DEFAULT 
                            wanted file category (that is selected, when 
                            GUF starts).
        
        ================================================================
                                COMMON NON-GIFS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF
        
             COMMENTS:  Same as "GIFs & Common Non-GIFs", except that; 
                        I've omitted the GIF files.
        
                        That way, you can search for these commonly 
                        ocurring graphic file formats, and know that all 
                        found will have to be converted to "Longs", 
                        before they can be viewed.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 69 of 202

        ================================================================
                               UNCOMMON NON-GIFS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  *.A   *.CLP *.FOP *.IBG *.LBM *.PNM *.RTL *.XBM
                        *.ART *.CLR *.GIS *.IDC *.MAC *.PPM *.R8  *.XPM
                        *.ASC *.CM  *.GM  *.IDX *.MTV *.PRE *.SCD *.XWD
                        *.A8  *.CRF *.GM2 *.IFF *.P   *.PZL *.SCX
                        *.BIF *.CUT *.GM4 *.IM  *.PAL *.QDV *.SGI
                        *.BIL *.DCX *.GOE *.IMG *.PBM *.Q0  *.SST
                        *.BM  *.EPI *.GRB *.IMQ *.PCL *.RAS *.TAB
                        *.B8  *.EPS *.G8  *.IM1 *.PDF *.RGB *.VI
                        *.CAL *.ERS *.HDR *.IM8 *.PGM *.RIX *.VIT
                        *.CEL *.FAL *.HRF *.LAN *.PM  *.RLE *.WPG
        
             COMMENTS:  These are the more obscure graphic file formats, 
                        supported by Image Alchemy.
        
                        I've placed these in a separate category, 
                        because this category contains so many 
                        FILENAME.EXTs, that searching for them can take 
                        quite a long time (minutes, rather than seconds; 
                        if you search a large hard disk (1 Gb), for 
                        example).
        
        		Since most of these graphic file formats are 
        		little used (in fact, you probably won't find 
        		any of them on your disk at all), it seems 
        		pointless slowing down the search for the more 
        		commonly used formats.	So, I've placed them in 
        		a separate category, to avoid this.
        
        ================================================================
                               UNLIKELY NON-GIFS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  *.DAT *.PRN
        
             COMMENTS:  These are another two obscure graphic file 
                        formats, recognised by Image Alchemy.  
                        Unfortunately, these graphic file formats use 
                        the commonly used "*.DAT" and "*.PRN" filename 
                        EXTensions.
        
                                "*.DAT" is the de facto standard 
                                extension, for a file that holds 
                                (usually application-specific) data of 
                                some kind.
        
                                "*.PRN" is a commonly used extension for 
                                a print file (printer output dumped to a 
                                disk file).

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 70 of 202

                        So, if you search for files with these 
                        EXTensions, you'll probably find LOTS of them, 
                        of which (quite likely) NONE will be the graphic 
                        file formats that Image Alchemy recognises.
        
                        So, rather than clutter up the file listings, 
                        with lots of *.DAT and *.PRN files that aren't 
                        graphic files at all, I've put these two 
                        EXTensions in a separate category, all by 
                        themselves.
        
        ================================================================
                               GUF SUPPORT FILES
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  SCNSHRTS.RFC WDWSHRTS.RFC
        
             COMMENTS:  This category contains the support files, 
                        created and maintained by GUF - other than the 
                        "Short" and "Long" files, categorised below.
        
                        Either or both of these files may appear in any 
                        directory that contains graphic files that you 
                        have created and selected full-screen and/or 
                        window "Shorts" for.
        
        ================================================================
                                     SHORTS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  GIF?????.KRT
        
             COMMENTS:	A "short" is a scaled copy of a source file, 
        		that fits exactly on the screen (or in the 
        		window) on (in) which it is to be displayed.
        
        		More specifically, a "short" is a (GIF) file, 
        		with a FILENAME.EXT of the form:-
        
        			GIF00001.KRT
        			GIF00002.KRT
        			    ...
        			GIF99999.KRT
        
        		Each "short", therefore, belongs to a "source 
        		file", and is placed in the same directory, as 
        		the source file to which it belongs
        
        		Since each "short" is simply an aid to viewing 
        		the source file to which it belongs - you do not 
        		normally want to search for or view the "short" 
        		files themselves.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 71 of 202

                        However, I have created a "wanted files" 
                        category for "Shorts", so that you can search 
                        for and list them.  It lets you see what GUF is 
                        up to.
        
                        However, I recommend that you leave it up to 
                        GUF, to create, delete and display the "short" 
                        files (*).  So, search for, list and view the 
                        "short" files, if you want to, but otherwise, 
                        LEAVE THEM ALONE.
        
                        (*)  Actually, you CANNOT CREATE "shorts" 
                             yourself, though you CAN DELETE them 
                             manually, if you want to.
        
        ================================================================
                                     LONGS
        ================================================================
        
        FILENAME.EXTs:  GIF?????.LNG
        
             COMMENTS:	A "long" is a copy, in GIF format, of a non-GIF 
        		graphic that you want to view.
        
        		(Since GUF will display only GIF files, if you 
        		want to view a non-GIF format graphic (using
        		GUF), you must create a "long" for it first.)
        
        		More specifically, a "long" is a (GIF) file, 
        		with a FILENAME.EXT of the form:-
        
        			GIF00001.LNG
        			GIF00002.LNG
        			    ...
        			GIF99999.LNG
        
        		Each "long", therefore, belongs to a "source 
        		file", and is placed in the same directory, as 
        		the source file to which it belongs
        
        		Since each "long" is simply an aid to viewing 
        		the source file to which it belongs - you do not 
        		normally want to search for or view the "long" 
        		files themselves.
        
                        However, I have created a "wanted files" 
                        category for "Longs", so that you can search for 
                        and list them.  It lets you see what GUF is up 
                        to.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 72 of 202

                        However, I recommend that you leave it up to 
                        GUF, to create, delete and display the "long" 
                        files (*).  So, search for, list and view the 
                        "long" files, if you want to, but otherwise, 
                        LEAVE THEM ALONE.
        
                        (*)  Actually, you CANNOT CREATE "longs" 
                             yourself, though you CAN DELETE them 
                             manually, if you wish to.
        
        ================================================================
                                 SCREEN LAYOUT
        ================================================================
        
        The "Wanted Files" level screens (there are only two of them), 
        are:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |                 Level 2 of 7 - Wanted Files                  |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  1  GIFs                                                     |
        |       *.GIF                                                  |
        |                                                              |
        |  2  GIFs & Common Non-GIFs                                   |
        |       *.GIF *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF        |
        |                                                              |
        |  3  Common Non-GIFs                                          |
        |       *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC *.RAW *.TIF              |
        |                                                              |
        |  4  Uncommon Non-GIFs                                        |
        |       *.A *.ART *.ASC *.A8 *.BIF *.BIL *.BM *.B8 *.CAL       |
        |       *.CEL *.CLP *.CLR *.CM *.CRF *.CUT *.DCX *.EPI *.EPS   |
        |       *.ERS *.FAL *.FOP *.GIS *.GM *.GM2 *.GM4 *.GOE *.GRB   |
        |       *.G8 *.HDR *.HRF *.IBG *.IDC *.IDX *.IFF *.IM *.IMG    |
        |       *.IMQ *.IM1 *.IM8 *.LAN *.LBM *.MAC *.MTV *.P *.PAL    |
        |       *.PBM *.PCL *.PDF *.PGM *.PM *.PNM *.PPM *.PRE *.PZL   |
        |       *.QDV *.Q0 *.RAS *.RGB *.RIX *.RLE *.RTL *.R8 *.SCD    |
        |       *.SCX *.SGI *.SST *.TAB *.VI *.VIT *.WPG *.XBM *.XPM   |
        |       *.XWD                                                  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp   1-Z=SelectWantedFiles(Category) |
        | Page1of2  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        and;

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 73 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |                 Level 2 of 7 - Wanted Files                  |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  1  Unlikely Non-GIFs                                        |
        |       *.DAT *.PRN                                            |
        |                                                              |
        |  2  GIF.EXE Support Files                                    |
        |       SCNSHRTS.RFC WDWSHRTS.RFC                              |
        |                                                              |
        |  3  Shorts                                                   |
        |       GIF?????.KRT                                           |
        |                                                              |
        |  4  Longs                                                    |
        |       GIF?????.LNG                                           |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp   1-Z=SelectWantedFiles(Category) |
        | Page2of2  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        ================================================================
                       OPERATING THE "WANTED FILES" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Operating the "Wanted Files" level is pretty straight-forward.
        
        The keys used are listed at the bottom of the screen (see 
        above).  Their use should be pretty much self-explanatory.
        
        The main keys to worry about, of course, are the "wanted file 
        category" selection keys.
        
        Just press the key - "1" to "Z" - shown alongside the name of 
        the wanted file category that you want to select.
        
        ================================================================
                    SELECTING ANOTHER "WANTED FILE CATEGORY"
        ================================================================
        
        The currently selected wanted file category, is highlighted (in 
        Red).
        
        NOTE!  When you first start GUF, the "wanted file category" 
               defaults to "GIFs & Common Non-GIFs".
        
        To SELECT ANOTHER CATEGORY, just press the key - "1" to "Z" - 
        shown alongside the name of the category that you want to 
        select.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 74 of 202

        The only (immediate) effect that this will have, is to change to 
        highlight (in Red), to the wanted file category you have just 
        selected.
        
        But, when you nest back down to the "Directorys" level, GUF 
        will:-
        
                        a)  Detect that you have selected another wanted
                            file category,
        
        and then;       b)  RELOAD the wanted (and matching) files - 
                            from the (currently selected) directory 
                            (tree).
        
        Once the files have been loaded, you will be dropped into the 
        "Directorys" level proper.  You will then find out whether the 
        currently selected directory (tree) contains any wanted and/or 
        matching files, or not.
        
        If it does, you can then nest down to view them, in the normal 
        fashion.
        
        If it does NOT, you can either:-
        
                1.  Press Esc ONCE - to nest back up to the "Wanted 
                    Files" level - and select another category of wanted 
                    files to search for,
        
                2.  Press Esc TWICE - to nest back up to the "Drives" 
                    level - and select another drive,
        
        or;     3.  Press /FL - to select another directory (tree) - to 
                    search for wanted and matching files in.
        
                    (This is generally the most useful option, since, if 
                    you press /FL5, for example, you can search the 
                    ENTIRE DISK, for files belonging to the wanted files 
                    category that you have selected.)
        
        ================================================================
                                TURNING THE PAGE
        ================================================================
        
        The "Wanted Files" level data, occupies (only) TWO pages.
        
        To move around them, use the standard page turning keys:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    page
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS page
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     page
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     page.

        Chapter 11: The "Wanted Files" Level ------------ Page 75 of 202

        ================================================================
                    CHANGING THE LEVEL (NESTING UP AND DOWN)
        ================================================================
        
        The "Wanted Files" level is level 2.
        
                     Level 1  =  DRIVES                    (Esc)
                -->  Level 2  =  Wanted Files
                     Level 3  =  DIRECTORYS                (Enter)
                     Level 4  =  Files (Stats Only)
                     Level 5  =  Files (Stats & Pictures)
                     Level 6  =  Full Screen (Shorts)
                     Level 7  =  Full Screen (Originals)
        
        Esc nests you up, to the DRIVES level.
        
        Enter nests you down, to the DIRECTORYS level.
        
        ================================================================
                               CHANGING THE VIEW
        ================================================================
        
        GUF, version 1c, supports only 1 "View".
        
        So, the view changing keys:-
        
                Backspace  =  Go to the PREVIOUS view
        and;    Tab        =  Go to the NEXT     view,
        
        DON'T WORK.
        
        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        You cannot quit GUF directly from the "Wanted Files" level; you 
        must nest down to the "Directorys" (or any lower) level, and 
        quit from there.
        
        In other words, to quit GUF, from the "Wanted Files" level:-
        
                -  Press Enter - to nest down to the Directorys Level
        
        then;   -  Press /     - to invoke the Main Menu
        
        then;   -  Press Q     - to Quit.
        
        Once you have done this, you will be returned to the program 
        from which you called GUF (usually either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
        or; Windows).

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 76 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 12                         ##
        ##                   THE "DIRECTORYS" LEVEL                   ##
        ################################################################
        
        The "Directorys" level lists the directorys containing wanted 
        and/or matching files.
        
        For each such directory, it shows the directory's name, plus the 
        number of wanted and matching files that it contains.
        
        This provides a "birds-eye" view - of where the wanted/matching 
        files, in the directory (tree) last searched, are located.
        
        NOTE!  If no directorys containing wanted/matching files were 
               found, then a "No Wanted Or Matching Files" error message 
               is displayed instead.
        
        The level also allows you to select any of the directorys 
        listed, so that you can either:-
        
                a)  Nest down, to the "Files (Stats Only)" level, to 
                    LIST the wanted/matching files that the directory 
                    contains,
        
        or;     b)  LOAD the directory (or it's directory tree) ONLY, so 
                    that only the directory (tree)'s wanted/matching 
                    files are listed (and can be viewed).

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 77 of 202

        ================================================================
                                 SCREEN LAYOUT
        ================================================================
        
        Here is a sample "Directorys" level screen; after a successful 
        search, for "GIFs", on drive C:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |                  Level 3 of 7 - Directorys                   |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |                  GIFs From C:\ (TREE)                  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1  C:\MONET\         15 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  2  C:\DOWNLOAD\      80 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  3  C:\RENOIR\         5 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Here is another sample "Directorys" level screen; after a 
        successful search, for "Common Non-GIFs", in the root directory 
        of drive A:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |                  Level 3 of 7 - Directorys                   |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |          Common Non-GIFs From A:\ (DIR ONLY)           |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1  A:\                  2 of 2 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 78 of 202

        Lastly, here is another sample "Directorys" level screen; after 
        an UN-successful search, for "GIFs" and *.GFX files, in 
        C:\DOS\:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |                  Level 3 of 7 - Directorys                   |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |       GIFs & *.GFX files From C:\DOS\ (DIR ONLY)       |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |          |      NO WANTED OR MATCHING FILES      |           |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |          |  There are NO `wanted' or `matching'  |           |
        |          |  files, in the currently selected     |           |
        |          |  directory (tree).  Suggestions...    |           |
        |          |  - Press /FL                          |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER DIRECTORY      |           |
        |          |      (TREE) to search (and LOAD).     |           |
        |          |  - Press Esc ONCE                     |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER SET OF         |           |
        |          |      FILENAME.EXTs (WANTED FILES)     |           |
        |          |      to search for.                   |           |
        |          |  - Press Esc TWICE                    |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER DRIVE.         |           |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        ================================================================
                        OPERATING THE "DIRECTORYS" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Operating the "Directorys" level is pretty straight-forward.
        
        Most of the keys used, are listed at the bottom of the screen 
        (see above).  Their use should be pretty self-explanatory.
        
        The other keys supported, but NOT listed at the bottom of the 
        screen, are:-
        
                -      1-Z = Select Directory
        
                -  Ctrl+F1 = Go to the PREVIOUS platform
                -  Ctrl+F2 = Go to the NEXT     platform
        
                -  Ctrl+F3 = Go to the PREVIOUS video mode
                -  Ctrl+F4 = Go to the NEXT     video mode

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 79 of 202

                -  Ctrl+F5 = Go to the PREVIOUS font
                -  Ctrl+F6 = Go to the NEXT     font
        
        NOTE!  You DON'T need to memorise all these keys.  They're ALL 
               listed on the "Directorys" level's "KEY SUMMARY".  Press 
               /K, from the "Directorys" level's main screen, to read 
               this "Key Summary".
        
        See below, for a more detailed explanation of these keys.
        
        ================================================================
                               THE "KEY SUMMARY"
        ================================================================
        
        The "Directorys" level supports a lot of keys.
        
        Fortunately, you DON'T need to memorise them all; because 
        they're ALL listed on the "Directorys" level's three-page "KEY 
        SUMMARY".
        
        To read this "Key Summary"; press /K, from the "Directorys" 
        level's main screen.
        
        If you do so, a box like the following will pop-up:-
        
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |           Directorys Level           |
                    |        K E Y    S U M M A R Y        |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |              / = Menu                |
                    |             /Q = Quit                |
                    |                                      |
                    |              [ = First    Page       |
                    |              < = Previous Page       |
                    |              > = Next     Page       |
                    |              ] = Last     Page       |
                    |                                      |
                    |            Esc = Nest Up             |
                    |          Enter = Nest Down           |
                    |                                      |
                    |      Backspace = Previous View       |
                    |            Tab = Next View           |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |             Page 1 of 4              |
                    |    <=Previous   >=Next   Esc=Quit    |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  You can press any key listed on the "Key Summary", and 
               that key will be processed exactly as if you had pressed 
               it from the level's main screen.
        
               The exceptions, are the following keys, which are used by 
               the "Key Summary" itself:-
        
                        <    =  PREVIOUS page
                        >    =  NEXT     page
                        Esc  =  QUIT

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 80 of 202

        ================================================================
                            THE "SEARCH DETAILS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Search Details" box, appears at the top of the screen, 
        immediately under the screen header.  For example:-
        
                The "Search Details" box -----+
                                              |
        +------------------------------------ | -----------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Ra | isk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search  | ine & Viewer           |
        |                  Level 3 of 7 - Dir | orys                   |
        +------------------------------------ | -----------------------+
        |                                     v                        |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |       GIFs & *.GFX files From C:\DOS\ (DIR ONLY)       |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        It shows the "wanted" and "matching" files that were last 
        searched for, and the directory (tree) in which the search was 
        performed.  For example:-
        
           +--------------------------------------------------------+
           |       GIFs & *.GFX files From C:\DOS\ (DIR ONLY)       |
           +--------------------------------------------------------+
                   \+-/   \----+----/      \--+--/ \---+----/
                    |          |              |        |
                    |          +----------+   |        |
                    +-----------------+   |   |        |
                                      |   |   |        |
                    "Wanted Files"  --+   |   |        |
                    "Matching Files"  ----+   |        |
                    "Root Directory"  --------+        |
                    "(TREE)" or "(DIR ONLY)"  ---------+
        
        In this example:-
        
                -  the "Wanted Files"   are;  GIFs
                -  the "Matching Files" are;  *.GFX files
                -  the "Root Directory"  is;  C:\DOS\
        and;    -          we are searching;  the root DIRectory, ONLY.

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 81 of 202

        ================================================================
                  SELECTING A DIRECTORY - TO "VIEW" OR "LOAD" 
        ================================================================
        
        You can "select" any of the directorys listed, by pressing the 
        key, "1" to "Z", shown immediately before it's name.
        
        If you do this, a box like the following, will pop up:-
        
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |              C:\MONET\               |
                    |                                      |
                    |        What do you want to do        |
                    |         with this DIRECTORY?         |
                    |                                      |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  | V  VIEW IT'S FILES             |  |
                    |  |    ...by nesting down, to the  |  |
                    |  |    "Files (Stats Only)" level. |  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  | L  LOAD IT'S FILES ONLY!       |  |
                    |  |    Load and list the           |  |
                    |  |    wanted/matching files, from |  |
                    |  |    this directory (tree) ONLY! |  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |             +----------+             |
                    |             | Esc=Quit |             |
                    |             +----------+             |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        You can now either:-
        
                -  Press V  ; to VIEW the directory's files
        
                -  Press L  ; to LOAD the directory's files only
        
        or;     -  Press Esc; to QUIT the box - and return to the main 
                              "Directorys" level screen.
        
        The VIEW and LOAD options, are described separately, below.
        
        ================================================================
                    "VIEWING" THE SELECTED DIRECTORY'S FILES
        ================================================================
        
        If you select the VIEW option (from the selected directory's 
        "What Do You Want To Do With This Directory?" box), you will be 
        nested down to the "Files (Stats Only)" level, at the page on 
        which the selected directory starts.

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 82 of 202

        The resulting screen will list; the names of the directorys 
        containing wanted and/or matching files (just like the 
        "Directorys" level), and; underneath each directory name, the 
        name and size (in pixels, colours and bytes), of each of the 
        wanted and matching files in the directory.
        
        For example:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |              Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)               |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |            Common Non-GIFs From C:\ (TREE)             |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1  C:\MONET\         15 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     2   MONETADR.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     3   MONETARG.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     4   MONETBCH.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     5   MONETCAP.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     6   MONETGRN.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |                                                              |
        |     7   MONETJPN.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     8   MONETPRC.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |             ...                ...                 ...       |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page3of9  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Since you are now in the "Files (Stats Only)" level, see the 
        Chapter describing that level, for details of what to do next.
        
        ================================================================
                    "LOADING" THE SELECTED DIRECTORY'S FILES
        ================================================================
        
        If you select the LOAD option (from the selected directory's 
        "What Do You Want To Do With This Directory?" box), a box like 
        the following, will pop up.

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 83 of 202

             +----------------------------------------------------+
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |             The currently loaded             |  |
             |  |         wanted & matching files are          |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |                     From                     |  |
             |  |                  C:\ (TREE)                  |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |                   Which of                   |  |
             |  |                 C:\MONET\'s                  |  |
             |  |            wanted/matching files             |  |
             |  |              (Common Non-GIFs)               |  |
             |  |             do you want to load?             |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  O  DIRECTORY ONLY                           |  |
             |  |       Those in the directory,                |  |
             |  |       ONLY!                                  |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  T  DIRECTORY TREE                           |  |
             |  |       A) those in the directory,             |  |
             |  |       AND; B) those in any                   |  |
             |  |       directory descended from it.           |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +-------------+  +----------+  +---------------+  |
             |  | W=+/-Wanted |  | Esc=Quit |  | M=+/-Matching |  |
             |  +-------------+  +----------+  +---------------+  |
             +----------------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  In this example, the currently loaded wanted and matching 
               files are; "Common Non-GIFs" from; C:\ (TREE).  Some of 
               those wanted and matching files came from (the directory) 
               C:\MONET\, and it is that directory that has been 
               selected, and which we now want to LOAD.
        
        You can now choose:-
        
                1.  Whether the wanted/matching files should be loaded 
                    from; a) the selected DIRECTORY ONLY, or; b) it's 
                    DIRECTORY TREE,
        
        and;    2.  Whether it is; a) the WANTED files, or; b) the 
                    MATCHING files, or; c) BOTH, that should be searched 
                    for, and loaded.
        
        You specify these options, with the following keys:-
        
                W  =  Toggle WANTED Files ON/OFF
                        Toggles a flag, that indicates whether or not 
                        the "wanted files" are to be searched for and 
                        loaded.

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 84 of 202

                        Only works though, if "matching files" were 
                        specified on the command line (when GUF was 
                        first started).  If NOT, the loading of "wanted 
                        files" is permanently ON, and cannot be turned 
                        OFF.
        
                M  =  Toggle MATCHING Files ON/OFF
                        Toggles a flag, that indicates whether or not 
                        the "matching files" (specified on the command 
                        line, when GUF was first started), are to be 
                        searched for and loaded.
        
                        Only works though, if "matching files" were 
                        specified.  If NOT, the loading of "matching 
                        files" is permanently OFF, and cannot be turned 
                        ON.
        
        The above keys simply toggle the appropriate flag, and then 
        re-draw the screen, to reflect the flag's new status.
        
        The following keys, however:-
        
                O  =  Load The Selected DIRECTORY ONLY
        
                T  =  Load The Selected directory's DIRECTORY TREE
        
        cause an "Are You Sure?" box like the following, to pop-up:-
        
             +----------------------------------------------------+
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |             The currently loaded             |  |
             |  |         wanted & matching files are          |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |                     From                     |  |
             |  |                  C:\ (TREE)                  |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |                   Load the                   |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |                     from                     |  |
             |  |          C:\MONET\ (DIRECTORY ONLY)          |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |                                                    |
             |                   ARE YOU SURE?                    |
             |                                                    |
             |                      WARNING!                      |
             |              This is your LAST CHANCE              |
             |            TO QUIT.  If you answer Yes,            |
             |             the wanted/matching files              |
             |                 will be reloaded.                  |
             |                                                    |
             |              +-------+       +------+              |
             |              | Y=Yes |       | N=No |              |
             |              +-------+       +------+              |
             +----------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 85 of 202

        Press:-
        
                Y = YES, if you want to proceed with the load
        
        or;     N = NO, if you don't.
        
        If you answer NO, you will be returned immediately, to the main
        "Directorys" level screen.
        
        If you answer YES, a box like the following, will pop up - while 
        the wanted and matching files are being reloaded:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | Searching Directory (Tree) - For Wanted & Matching Files | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                              |
        |             Root Directory:  C:\MONET\                       |
        |                 TREE Mode?:  No                              |
        |           Matching File(s):                                  |
        |  Include Matching File(s)?:  Yes                             |
        |             Wanted File(s):  Common Non-GIFs                 |
        |                           :  *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC   |
        |     Include Wanted File(s):  Yes                             |
        |                                                              |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |   #Matches:  8                                           | |
        | | Last Match:  C:\MONET\                                   | |
        | |           :  MONETPRC.JPG                                | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |                        please wait...                    | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                 +-------------------------+                  |
        |                 | Press Esc to Pause/Quit |                  |
        |                 +-------------------------+                  |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  The "Press Esc to Pause/Quit" function is NOT yet 
               implemented.  In other words, pressing the Esc key will 
               have NO effect.
        
        Once the search is complete, you will be prompted to "Press any 
        key to continue...".
        
        Once you have done that, you will be returned to the main 
        "Directorys" level screen - which will now list the directory(s) 
        containing the newly loaded wanted and matching files
        
        ================================================================
                                TURNING THE PAGE
        ================================================================
        
        The "Directorys" level occupies as many pages as are required to 
        list all the directorys found (containing wanted/matching 
        files).

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 86 of 202

        To move through the pages, use the standard page turning keys:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    page
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS page
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     page
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     page.
        
        ================================================================
                    CHANGING THE LEVEL (NESTING UP AND DOWN)
        ================================================================
        
        The "Directorys" level is level 3.
        
                     Level 1  =  Drives
                     Level 2  =  WANTED FILES              (Esc)
                -->  Level 3  =  Directorys
                     Level 4  =  FILES (STATS ONLY)        (Enter)
                     Level 5  =  Files (Stats & Pictures)
                     Level 6  =  Full Screen (Shorts)
                     Level 7  =  Full Screen (Originals)
        
        Esc nests you up, to the "WANTED FILES" level.
        
        Enter nests you down, to the "FILES (STATS ONLY)" level.
        
        ================================================================
                               CHANGING THE VIEW
        ================================================================
        
        GUF, version 1c, supports only 1 "View".
        
        So, the view changing keys:-
        
                Backspace  =  Go to the PREVIOUS view
        and;    Tab        =  Go to the NEXT     view,
        
        DON'T WORK.
        
        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        To quit GUF, from the "Directorys" level:-
        
                        -  Press /  -  to invoke the Main Menu
        
        and then;       -  Press Q  -  to Quit.
        
        Once you have done this, you will be returned to the program 
        from which you called GUF (usually either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
        or; Windows).

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 87 of 202

        ================================================================
                      THE ("DIRECTORYS" LEVEL) "MAIN MENU"
        ================================================================
        
        Press /, to activate the "Directorys" level "Main Menu":-
        
          +---------------------------------------------------------+
          |                           GUF                           |
          |           Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
          |                Version 1c - 16 July 1998                |
          |              (C) 1998 Red Flower Computers              |
          |                   All Rights Reserved                   |
          |                                                         |
          |  +---------------------------------------------------+  |
          |  |                     MAIN MENU                     |  |
          |  +---------------------------------------------------+  |
          |                                                         |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |    FL=Find & Load Files    |  B=Batch Operations  |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |        SU=Set-Up           |      SH=Shorts       |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |             -              |       L=Longs        |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |  V=Toggle Video Modes Box  |          -           |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |    FO=Toggle Fonts Box     |    K=Key Summary     |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |             -              |    U=User Manual     |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |        A=All Boxes         |    R=Registration    |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |      D=Default Boxes       |          -           |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |         N=No Boxes         |        Q=Quit        |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |                 +----------------------+                |
          |                 |  Esc=CancelMainMenu  |                |
          |                 +----------------------+                |
          +---------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Press Esc, to CANCEL this menu, and return to the main 
        "Directorys" level screen.
        
        This menu lists a number of options; but NOT all them work.
        
        The options that DON'T work, are:-
        
                SU = SET-UP
                B  = BATCH OPERATIONS
                SH = SHORTS
                L  = LONGS

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 88 of 202

        The options that DO work, are:-
        
                FL = FIND & LOAD FILES (*)
                        Allows you to select another directory (tree) to 
                        load the wanted and/or matching files from.
        
                V  = TOGGLE VIDEO MODES BOX (*)
                        Toggles the "Video Modes" box, ON and OFF.
        
                FO = TOGGLE FONTS BOX (*)
                        Toggles the "Fonts" box, ON and OFF.
        
                A  = ALL BOXES (*)
                        Toggles all the available boxes ON and OFF.
        
                D  = DEFAULT BOXES (*)
                        Turns the default boxes ON, and all the other 
                        boxes OFF.
        
                N  = NO BOXES (*)
                        Turns ALL the boxes OFF.
        
                K  = KEY SUMMARY
                        Displays a multi-page list, of ALL the keys 
                        supported by the "Directorys" level, and what 
                        they do.
        
                R  = REGISTRATION
                        Displays the screens that summarise the 
                        Shareware nature of GUF, and it's registration 
                        cost.
        
                Q  = QUIT
                        Quits GUF (without any further confirmation), 
                        and returns you to the program from which you 
                        called GUF (usually, either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
                        or; Windows).
        
        (*)  The options marked with an asterisk (*), are described in 
             more detail, below.
        
        ================================================================
                       THE "VIDEO MODES" & "FONTS" BOXES
        ================================================================
        
        The "Directorys" level supports two "boxes", that pop-up on the 
        screen, to provide additional information to you.
        
        These boxes are:-
        
                THE "VIDEO MODES" BOX
                        Describes the currently selected video mode, and 
                        lists the keys used to interactively change it.  
                        Ie;

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 89 of 202

                           +------------------------------------------+
                           |            BIOS Video Mode 3             |
                           |  +------------------+  +--------------+  |
                           |  | Ctrl+F3=Previous |  | Ctrl+F4=Next |  |
                           |  +------------------+  +--------------+  |
                           |       CGA 80x25 16colours ColourON       |
                           +------------------------------------------+
        
                THE "FONTS" BOX
                        Describes the currently selected font, and lists 
                        the keys used to interactively change it.  Ie;
        
                           +------------------------------------------+
                           |               Font 2 of 3                |
                           |  +------------------+  +--------------+  |
                           |  | Ctrl+F5=Previous |  | Ctrl+F6=Next |  |
                           |  +------------------+  +--------------+  |
                           |                BIOS 8x14                 |
                           +------------------------------------------+
        
        By DEFAULT, BOTH of these boxes are OFF.  (That is, they do NOT
        appear on the screen.)
        
        But you can enable and disable these boxes - with the following 
        MAIN MENU options:-
        
                V  = TOGGLE VIDEO MODES BOX
                        Toggles the "Video Modes" box, ON and OFF.
        
                FO = TOGGLE FONTS BOX
                        Toggles the "Fonts" box, ON and OFF.
        
                A  = ALL BOXES
                        Toggles all the available boxes ON and OFF.
        
                D  = DEFAULT BOXES
                        Turns the default boxes ON, and all the other 
                        boxes OFF.
        
                N  = NO BOXES
                        Turns ALL the boxes OFF.
        
        ================================================================
                         THE "FIND & LOAD FILES" OPTION
        ================================================================
        
        If you select the "FL=FIND & LOAD FILES" option - from the 
        "Directorys" level MAIN MENU - a box like the following, will 
        pop-up:-

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 90 of 202

             +----------------------------------------------------+
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |             The currently loaded             |  |
             |  |         wanted & matching files are          |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |                     From                     |  |
             |  |           C:\ART\MONET\ (DIR ONLY)           |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |           Which directory (tree)'s           |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |           do you want to LOAD now?           |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  1  SAME       - TREE                        |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  2  PARENT     - DIRECTORY ONLY              |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  3  PARENT     - TREE                        |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  4  DRIVE ROOT - DIRECTORY ONLY              |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |  5  DRIVE ROOT - TREE                        |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +-------------+  +----------+  +---------------+  |
             |  | W=+/-Wanted |  | Esc=Quit |  | M=+/-Matching |  |
             |  +-------------+  +----------+  +---------------+  |
             +----------------------------------------------------+
        
        You can now choose:-
        
                1.  The DIRECTORY (TREE) to be searched,
        
        and;    2.  Whether it is; a) the WANTED files, or; b) the 
                    MATCHING files, or; c) BOTH, that should be searched 
                    for, and loaded.
        
        You specify these options, with the following keys:-
        
                W  =  Toggle WANTED Files ON/OFF
                        Toggles a flag, that indicates whether or not 
                        the "wanted files" are to be searched for and 
                        loaded.
        
                        Only works though, if "matching files" were 
                        specified on the command line (when GUF was 
                        first started).  If NOT, the loading of "wanted 
                        files" is permanently ON, and cannot be turned 
                        OFF.
        
                M  =  Toggle MATCHING Files ON/OFF
                        Toggles a flag, that indicates whether or not 
                        the "matching files" (specified on the command 
                        line, when GUF was first started), are to be 
                        searched for and loaded.

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 91 of 202

                        Only works though, if "matching files" were 
                        specified.  If NOT, the loading of "matching 
                        files" is permanently OFF, and cannot be turned 
                        ON.
        
        The above keys simply toggle the appropriate flag, and then 
        re-draw the screen, to reflect the flag's new status.
        
        The DIRECTORY (TREE) selection options are:-
        
                1  SAME (TREE or DIR ONLY)
                        The "root directory" stays the same - but "tree 
                        mode" is toggled.
        
                        In the example above; the currently loaded "root 
                        directory" is C:\ART\MONET\, and this does NOT 
                        change.  But "tree mode" is toggled, from (DIR 
                        ONLY) to (TREE).
        
                2  PARENT (DIRECTORY ONLY)
                        The "root directory" becomes the PARENT of the 
                        currently loadedly loaded "root directory" - and 
                        "tree mode" is set OFF.
        
                        In the example above; the currently loaded "root 
                        directory" is C:\ART\MONET\; so the new "root 
                        directory" (and "tree mode") is C:\ART\ (DIR 
                        ONLY).
        
                3  PARENT (TREE)
                        The "root directory" becomes the PARENT of the 
                        currently loadedly loaded "root directory" - and 
                        "tree mode" is set ON.
        
                        In the example above; the currently loaded "root 
                        directory" is C:\ART\MONET\; so the new "root 
                        directory" (and "tree mode) is C:\ART\ (TREE).
        
                4  DRIVE ROOT (DIRECTORY ONLY)
                        The "root directory" becomes the currently 
                        selected drive's "root directory" - and "tree 
                        mode" is set OFF.
        
                        In the example above; the currently loaded "root 
                        directory" is C:\ART\MONET\; so the new "root 
                        directory" (and "tree mode") is C:\ (DIR ONLY).
        
                5  DRIVE ROOT (TREE)
                        The "root directory" becomes the currently 
                        selected drive's "root directory" - and "tree 
                        mode" is set ON.
        
                        In the example above; the currently loaded "root 
                        directory" is C:\ART\MONET\; so the new "root 
                        directory" (and "tree mode") is C:\ (TREE).

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 92 of 202

        The most useful options above are probably 1 and 5.
        
        Option 1 - SAME - lets you toggle tree mode, and then reload the 
        currently loaded directory (tree).
        
        Option 5 - DRIVE ROOT (TREE) - lets you search the ENTIRE DISK, 
        for wanted/matching files.  It's the fastest way of finding 
        those files.
        
        If you select one of the DIRECTORY (TREE) options, an "Are You 
        Sure?" box like the following, will pop-up:-
        
             +----------------------------------------------------+
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |             The currently loaded             |  |
             |  |         wanted & matching files are          |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |                     From                     |  |
             |  |           C:\ART\MONET\ (DIR ONLY)           |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |  |                   Load the                   |  |
             |  |               Common Non-GIFs                |  |
             |  |                     from                     |  |
             |  |                  C:\ (TREE)                  |  |
             |  +----------------------------------------------+  |
             |                                                    |
             |                   ARE YOU SURE?                    |
             |                                                    |
             |                      WARNING!                      |
             |              This is your LAST CHANCE              |
             |            TO QUIT.  If you answer Yes,            |
             |             the wanted/matching files              |
             |                 will be reloaded.                  |
             |                                                    |
             |              +-------+       +------+              |
             |              | Y=Yes |       | N=No |              |
             |              +-------+       +------+              |
             +----------------------------------------------------+
        
        Press:-
        
                Y = YES, if you want to proceed with the load
        
        or;     N = NO, if you don't.
        
        If you answer NO, you will be returned immediately, to the main
        "Directorys" level screen.
        
        If you answer YES, a box like the following, will pop up - while 
        the wanted and matching files are being reloaded:-

        Chapter 12: The "Directorys" Level -------------- Page 93 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | Searching Directory (Tree) - For Wanted & Matching Files | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                              |
        |             Root Directory:  C:\                             |
        |                 TREE Mode?:  Yes                             |
        |           Matching File(s):                                  |
        |  Include Matching File(s)?:  No                              |
        |             Wanted File(s):  Common Non-GIFs                 |
        |                           :  *.BMP *.ICO *.JPG *.PCX *.PIC   |
        |     Include Wanted File(s):  Yes                             |
        |                                                              |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |   #Matches:  8                                           | |
        | | Last Match:  C:\MONET\                                   | |
        | |           :  MONETPRC.JPG                                | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |                        please wait...                    | |
        | +----------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                 +-------------------------+                  |
        |                 | Press Esc to Pause/Quit |                  |
        |                 +-------------------------+                  |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  The "Press Esc to Pause/Quit" function is NOT yet 
               implemented.  In other words, pressing the Esc key will 
               have NO effect.
        
        Once the search is complete, you will be prompted to "Press any 
        key to continue...".
        
        Once you have done that, you will be returned to the main 
        "Directorys" level screen - which will now list the directory(s) 
        containing the newly loaded wanted and matching files.

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ------ Page 94 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 13                         ##
        ##               THE "FILES (STATS ONLY)" LEVEL               ##
        ################################################################
        
        The "Files (Stats Only)" level:-
        
        LISTS;  a)  The DIRECTORYS containing wanted and/or matching
                    files (like the "Directorys" level),
        
        and;    b)  Underneath each directory, the FILENAME.EXT and SIZE 
                    (in pixels, colours and bytes), of each of the 
                    wanted and matching FILES in the directory.
        
        The result is a listing, similar to that produced by the MS-DOS 
        "DIR" command, but that:-
        
                a)  Shows the wanted/matching (GRAPHIC) files only,
        
                b)  Shows each such GRAPHIC's height and width (in 
                    pixels), and number of colours (as well as the file 
                    size, in bytes),
        
        and;    b)  Is paginated, and thus, can be browsed.
        
        NOTE!  If no wanted/matching files were found, then a "No Wanted 
               Or Matching Files" error message is displayed instead.
        
        The level also allows you to SELECT any of the files and
        directorys listed - for further processing, as described below.

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ------ Page 95 of 202

        ================================================================
                                 SCREEN LAYOUT
        ================================================================
        
        Here is a sample "Files (Stats Only)" level screen; after a 
        successful search, for "Common Non-GIFs", on drive C:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |              Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)               |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |            Common Non-GIFs From C:\ (TREE)             |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1  C:\MONET\          6 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     2   MONETADR.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     3   MONETARG.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     4   MONETBCH.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     5   MONETCAP.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     6   MONETGRN.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |                                                              |
        |     7   MONETJPN.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |     8   MONETPRC.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  9  C:\RENOIR\        30 of 100 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     A   RENOIR1.PCX    640w 480h 256 colours   99,999 bytes  |
        |     B   RENOIR2.PCX    640w 480h 256 colours   99,999 bytes  |
        |     C   RENOIR3.PCX    640w 480h 256 colours   99,999 bytes  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of9  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Here is another sample "Files (Stats Only)" level screen; after 
        an UN-successful search, for "GIFs" and *.GFX files, in 
        C:\DOS\:-

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ------ Page 96 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |              Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)               |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |       GIFs & *.GFX files From C:\DOS\ (DIR ONLY)       |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |          |      NO WANTED OR MATCHING FILES      |           |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |          |  There are NO `wanted' or `matching'  |           |
        |          |  files, in the currently selected     |           |
        |          |  directory (tree).  Suggestions...    |           |
        |          |  - Press /FL                          |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER DIRECTORY      |           |
        |          |      (TREE) to search (and LOAD).     |           |
        |          |  - Press Esc TWICE                    |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER SET OF         |           |
        |          |      FILENAME.EXTs (WANTED FILES)     |           |
        |          |      to search for.                   |           |
        |          |  - Press Esc THREE TIMES              |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER DRIVE.         |           |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        ================================================================
                    OPERATING THE "FILES (STATS ONLY)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Operating the "Files (Stats Only)" level is pretty 
        straight-forward.
        
        The main keys used, are listed at the bottom of the screen (see 
        above).  Their use should be pretty self-explanatory.
        
        The other keys supported, but NOT listed at the bottom of the 
        screen, are:-
        
                -      1-Z = Select File or Directory
        
                -  Ctrl+F1 = Go to the PREVIOUS platform
                -  Ctrl+F2 = Go to the NEXT     platform
        
                -  Ctrl+F3 = Go to the PREVIOUS video mode
                -  Ctrl+F4 = Go to the NEXT     video mode
        
                -  Ctrl+F5 = Go to the PREVIOUS font
                -  Ctrl+F6 = Go to the NEXT     font

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ------ Page 97 of 202

                -   Alt+F1 = DEcrease Blank Lines Between Directorys
                -   Alt+F2 = INcrease Blank Lines Between Directorys
        
                -   Alt+F3 = DEcrease Blank Lines Before First Block
                -   Alt+F4 = INcrease Blank Lines Before First Block
        
                -   Alt+F5 = DEcrease Blank Lines Between Blocks
                -   Alt+F6 = INcrease Blank Lines Between Blocks
        
                -   Alt+F7 = DEcrease Lines Per Block
                -   Alt+F8 = INcrease Lines Per Block
        
        ================================================================
                               THE "KEY SUMMARY"
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats Only)" level supports a lot of keys.  
        
        Fortunately, you DON'T need to memorise them all; because 
        they're ALL listed on the "Files (Stats Only)" level's four-page 
        "KEY SUMMARY".
        
        To read this "Key Summary"; press /K, from the "Files (Stats 
        Only)" level's main screen.
        
        If you do so, a box like the following will pop-up:-
        
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |       Files (Stats Only) Level       |
                    |        K E Y    S U M M A R Y        |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |              / = Menu                |
                    |             /Q = Quit                |
                    |                                      |
                    |              [ = First    Page       |
                    |              < = Previous Page       |
                    |              > = Next     Page       |
                    |              ] = Last     Page       |
                    |                                      |
                    |            Esc = Nest Up             |
                    |          Enter = Nest Down           |
                    |                                      |
                    |      Backspace = Previous View       |
                    |            Tab = Next View           |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |             Page 1 of 5              |
                    |    <=Previous   >=Next   Esc=Quit    |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  You can press any key listed on the "Key Summary", and 
               that key will be processed exactly as if you had pressed 
               it from the level's main screen.

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ------ Page 98 of 202

               The exceptions, are the following keys, which are used by 
               the "Key Summary" itself:-
        
                        <    =  PREVIOUS page
                        >    =  NEXT     page
                        Esc  =  QUIT
        
        ================================================================
                            THE "SEARCH DETAILS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Search Details" box works exactly the same, in the "Files 
        (Stats Only)" level, as it does in the "Directorys" level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                         SELECTING A FILE OR DIRECTORY
        ================================================================
        
        If you press one of the number/letter keys ("1" to "Z"), shown 
        to the left of each file/directory name - one of the following 
        boxes will pop-up (depending on whether the selected item was a 
        file or a directory).
        
        For a FILE (in this example; C:\MONET\MONETBCH.JPG):-
        
                   +----------------------------------------+
                   |               C:\MONET\                |
                   |              MONETBCH.JPG              |
                   |                                        |
                   |         What do you want to do         |
                   |            with this FILE?             |
                   |                                        |
                   |  +--------+  +-------+   +----------+  |
                   |  | V=View |  | T=Tag |   | D=Delete |  |
                   |  +--------+  +-------+   +----------+  |
                   |  +----------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
                   |  | R=Rename |  | C=Copy |  | M=Move |  |
                   |  +----------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
                   |         +--------------------+         |
                   |         | EF=EditFileComment |         |
                   |         +--------------------+         |
                   |       +-----------------------+        |
                   |       | EP=EditPictureComment |        |
                   |       +-----------------------+        |
                   |     +----------------------------+     |
                   |     | I=InspectInternalStructure |     |
                   |     +----------------------------+     |
                   |                                        |
                   |              +----------+              |
                   |              | Esc=Quit |              |
                   |              +----------+              |
                   +----------------------------------------+

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ------ Page 99 of 202

        For a DIRECTORY (in this example; C:\MONET\):-
        
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |              C:\MONET\               |
                    |                                      |
                    |        What do you want to do        |
                    |         with this DIRECTORY?         |
                    |                                      |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  | V  VIEW IT'S FILES GRAPHICALLY |  |
                    |  |    ...by nesting down, to the  |  |
                    |  |    "Files (Stats & Pictures)"  |  |
                    |  |    level.                      |  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  | L  LOAD IT'S FILES ONLY!       |  |
                    |  |    Load and list the           |  |
                    |  |    wanted/matching files, from |  |
                    |  |    this directory (tree) ONLY! |  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |             +----------+             |
                    |             | Esc=Quit |             |
                    |             +----------+             |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        Obviously, files and directorys are handled differently - as 
        described separately, below.
        
        ================================================================
                   SELECTING A FILE - TO "VIEW" OR "INSPECT"
        ================================================================
        
        If you "select" a FILE (by pressing the number/letter key ("1" 
        to "Z",) shown immediately before it's name), a box like the 
        following, will pop up:-

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 100 of 202

                   +----------------------------------------+
                   |               C:\MONET\                |
                   |              MONETBCH.JPG              |
                   |                                        |
                   |         What do you want to do         |
                   |            with this FILE?             |
                   |                                        |
                   |  +--------+  +-------+   +----------+  |
                   |  | V=View |  | T=Tag |   | D=Delete |  |
                   |  +--------+  +-------+   +----------+  |
                   |  +----------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
                   |  | R=Rename |  | C=Copy |  | M=Move |  |
                   |  +----------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
                   |         +--------------------+         |
                   |         | EF=EditFileComment |         |
                   |         +--------------------+         |
                   |       +-----------------------+        |
                   |       | EP=EditPictureComment |        |
                   |       +-----------------------+        |
                   |     +----------------------------+     |
                   |     | I=InspectInternalStructure |     |
                   |     +----------------------------+     |
                   |                                        |
                   |              +----------+              |
                   |              | Esc=Quit |              |
                   |              +----------+              |
                   +----------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  In the (example) box shown above, the selected file was 
               C:\MONET\MONETBCH.JPG.
        
        Press Esc, to CANCEL this box, and return to the main "Files 
        (Stats Only)" level screen.
        
        This box gives you NINE options - as to what you can do with the 
        selected file.
        
        However, only TWO of those options work (*):-
        
                V = VIEW
                        Nests you down to the "File (Stats & Pictures)" 
                        level - to the page on which the selected file
                        appears.
        
                I = INSPECT INTERNAL STRUCTURE
                        Allows you to view the internal structure of a 
                        GIF file.
        
                        See below, for more details.
        
        (*) The remaining options (those that DON'T work), don't work 
            because they haven't been implemented yet (as of GUF version 
            1c).  I'll fire them up, in later versions.

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 101 of 202

        ================================================================
                    THE "INSPECT INTERNAL STRUCTURE" OPTION
        ================================================================
        
        This option, allows you to inspect the internal structure of a 
        GIF file.
        
        In other words, it lists out the data, stored in the various 
        data tables stored in the GIF file.  It also allows you to 
        browse through the GIF's `global palette'.
        
        However, this option is NOT FULLY IMPLEMENTED yet.  (As of GUF 
        version 1c, only the palette browser function works.)
        
        NOTE!  Even if the option were fully implemented, it is probably 
               only of interest to programmers, who have to display and 
               otherwise manipulate GIF files.  (Even then, you need a 
               copy of the GIF file specification, in order to make 
               sense of it.)
        
               I've implemented this option, because I'm a programmer 
               who has to display and otherwise manipulate GIF files.  
               But, since;
                       a)  It's not yet fully implemented,
               and;    b)  It's not likely to be of much use, to most
                           GUF end users, even if it were,
               I haven't bothered describing it in any detail.
        
        If you want to use the option, go for it.  Otherwise, you may as 
        well ignore it.  I'll try to finish it off, in future versions.
        
        NOTE!  The option only works for GIF files.  If you try to use 
               it on non-GIFs, it'll just BEEP at you.
        
        ================================================================
                  SELECTING A DIRECTORY - TO "VIEW" OR "LOAD" 
        ================================================================
        
        If you "select" a DIRECTORY (by pressing the number/letter key 
        ("1" to "Z",) shown immediately before it's name), a box like 
        the following, will pop up:-

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 102 of 202

                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |              C:\MONET\               |
                    |                                      |
                    |        What do you want to do        |
                    |         with this DIRECTORY?         |
                    |                                      |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  | V  VIEW IT'S FILES GRAPHICALLY |  |
                    |  |    ...by nesting down, to the  |  |
                    |  |    "Files (Stats & Pictures)"  |  |
                    |  |    level.                      |  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |  | L  LOAD IT'S FILES ONLY!       |  |
                    |  |    Load and list the           |  |
                    |  |    wanted/matching files, from |  |
                    |  |    this directory (tree) ONLY! |  |
                    |  +--------------------------------+  |
                    |             +----------+             |
                    |             | Esc=Quit |             |
                    |             +----------+             |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        You can now either:-
        
                -  Press V  ; to VIEW the directory's files GRAPHICALLY
        
                -  Press L  ; to LOAD the directory's files only
        
        or;     -  Press Esc; to QUIT the box - and return to the main 
                              "Files (Stats Only)" level screen.
        
        The VIEW and LOAD options, are described separately, below.
        
        ================================================================
                    "VIEWING" THE SELECTED DIRECTORY'S FILES
        ================================================================
        
        If you select the VIEW option (from the selected directory's 
        "What Do You Want To Do With This Directory?" box), you will be 
        nested down to the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, at the page 
        on which the FIRST FILE in the selected directory appears.
        
        The resulting screen looks much like the "Files (Stats Only)" 
        level screen you have just left.  But, it also DISPLAYS each 
        file's GRAPHIC, in a window, immediately above the file's name 
        and size.
        
        For example:-

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 103 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |           Level 5 of 7 - Files (Stats & Pictures)            |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |            Common Non-GIFs From C:\ (TREE)             |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  C:\MONET\               1 of 5 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |         +-------------------------------------------------+  |
        |         |                                                 |  |
        |         |         (THE FILE'S GRAPHIC GOES HERE)          |  |
        |         |                                                 |  |
        |         +-------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     1   MONETADR.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of5  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Since you are now in the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, see 
        the Chapter describing that level, for details of what to do 
        next.
        
        ================================================================
                    "LOADING" THE SELECTED DIRECTORY'S FILES
        ================================================================
        
        The LOAD option works exactly the same, in the "Files (Stats 
        Only)" level, as it does in the "Directorys" level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                                TURNING THE PAGE
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats Only)" level, occupies as many pages as are 
        required to list the wanted and matching files found.
        
        To move through the pages, use the standard page turning keys:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    page
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS page
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     page
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     page.

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 104 of 202

        ================================================================
                    CHANGING THE LEVEL (NESTING UP AND DOWN)
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats Only)" level, is level 4.
        
                     Level 1  =  Drives
                     Level 2  =  Wanted Files
                     Level 3  =  DIRECTORYS                (Esc)
                -->  Level 4  =  Files (Stats Only)
                     Level 5  =  FILES (STATS & PICTURES)  (Enter)
                     Level 6  =  Full Screen (Shorts)
                     Level 7  =  Full Screen (Originals)
        
        Esc nests you up, to the "DIRECTORY" level.
        
        Enter nests you down, to the "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" level.
        
        ================================================================
                               CHANGING THE VIEW
        ================================================================
        
        GUF, version 1c, supports only 1 "View".
        
        So, the view changing keys:-
        
                Backspace  =  Go to the PREVIOUS view
        and;    Tab        =  Go to the NEXT     view,
        
        DON'T WORK.
        
        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        To quit GUF, from the "Files (Stats Only)" level:-
        
                        -  Press /  -  to invoke the Main Menu
        
        and then;       -  Press Q  -  to Quit.
        
        Once you have done this, you will be returned to the program 
        from which you called GUF (usually either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
        or; Windows).

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 105 of 202

        ================================================================
                                THE "MAIN MENU"
        ================================================================
        
        Press /, to activate the "Files (Stats Only)" level's "Main 
        Menu":-
        
          +---------------------------------------------------------+
          |                           GUF                           |
          |           Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
          |                Version 1c - 16 July 1998                |
          |              (C) 1998 Red Flower Computers              |
          |                   All Rights Reserved                   |
          |                                                         |
          |  +---------------------------------------------------+  |
          |  |                     MAIN MENU                     |  |
          |  +---------------------------------------------------+  |
          |                                                         |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |    FL=Find & Load Files    |  B=Batch Operations  |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |        SU=Set-Up           |      SH=Shorts       |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |             -              |       L=Longs        |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |  V=Toggle Video Modes Box  |          -           |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |    FO=Toggle Fonts Box     |    K=Key Summary     |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |             -              |    U=User Manual     |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |        A=All Boxes         |    R=Registration    |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |      D=Default Boxes       |          -           |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |         N=No Boxes         |        Q=Quit        |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |                 +----------------------+                |
          |                 |  Esc=CancelMainMenu  |                |
          |                 +----------------------+                |
          +---------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Press Esc, to CANCEL this menu, and return to the main "Files 
        (Stats Only)" level screen.
        
        This menu lists a number of options; but NOT all them work.
        
        The options that DON'T work, are:-
        
                SU = SET-UP
                B  = BATCH OPERATIONS

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 106 of 202

        The options that DO work, are:-
        
                FL = FIND & LOAD FILES (*)
                        Allows you to select another directory (tree) to 
                        load the wanted and/or matching files from.
        
                V  = TOGGLE VIDEO MODES BOX (#)
                        Toggles the "Video Modes" box, ON and OFF.
        
                FO = TOGGLE FONTS BOX (#)
                        Toggles the "Fonts" box, ON and OFF.
        
                A  = ALL BOXES (#)
                        Toggles all the available boxes ON and OFF.
        
                D  = DEFAULT BOXES (#)
                        Turns the default boxes ON, and all the other 
                        boxes OFF.
        
                N  = NO BOXES (#)
                        Turns ALL the boxes OFF.
        
                SH = SHORTS
                        Calls up the "Shorts" function; that you use to 
                        create and delete "shorts".  The "Shorts" 
                        function is quite complex - and is described in 
                        it's own separate Chapter, below.
        
                L  = LONGS
                        Calls up the "Longs" function; that you use to 
                        create and delete "longs".  The "Longs" function 
                        is quite complex - and is described in it's own 
                        separate Chapter, below.
        
                K  = KEY SUMMARY
                        Displays a multi-page list, of ALL the keys 
                        supported by the "files (Stats Only)" level, and 
                        what they do.
        
                R  = REGISTRATION
                        Displays the screens that summarise the 
                        Shareware nature of GUF, and it's registration 
                        cost.
        
                Q  = QUIT
                        Quits GUF (without any further confirmation), 
                        and returns you to the program from which you 
                        called GUF (usually, either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
                        or; Windows).
        
        (*)  This option is described in more detail, in the section 
             entitled "THE "FIND & LOAD FILES" OPTION", below.
        
        (#)  These options are described in more detail, in the section 
             entitled "THE "VIDEO MODES" & "FONTS" BOXES", below.

        Chapter 13: The "Files (Stats Only)" Level ----- Page 107 of 202

        ================================================================
                       THE "VIDEO MODES" & "FONTS" BOXES
        ================================================================
        
        The "Video Modes" and "Fonts" boxes, work exactly the same, in 
        the "Files (Stats Only)" level, as they do in the "Directorys" 
        level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                         THE "FIND & LOAD FILES" OPTION
        ================================================================
        
        The "FL=FIND & LOAD FILES" option works exactly the same, in the 
        "Files (Stats Only)" level, as it does in the "Directorys" 
        level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 108 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 14                         ##
        ##            THE "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" LEVEL            ##
        ################################################################
        
        The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level:-
        
        LISTS;  a)  The DIRECTORYS containing wanted and/or matching 
                    files (like the "Directorys" level),
        
        and;    b)  Underneath each directory:-
                                -  The NAME and SIZE (in pixels, colours 
                                   and bytes),
                    and;        -  The GRAPHIC,
                    of each of the wanted and matching FILES in the
                    directory.
        
        The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, thus, looks like the 
        "Files (Stats Only)" level; except that it also shows each 
        file's GRAPHIC - in a window, immediately above the file's name 
        and size data.
        
        NOTE!  If no wanted/matching files were found, then a "No Wanted 
               Or Matching Files" error message is displayed instead.
        
        The level also allows you to SELECT any of the files listed - 
        for further processing, as described below.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 109 of 202

        ================================================================
                                 SCREEN LAYOUT
        ================================================================
        
        Here is a sample "File (Stats & Pictures)" level screen; after a 
        successful search, for "Common Non-GIFs", on drive C:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |           Level 5 of 7 - Files (Stats & Pictures)            |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |            Common Non-GIFs From C:\ (TREE)             |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  C:\MONET\               1 of 5 wanted/matching files  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |         +-------------------------------------------------+  |
        |         |                                                 |  |
        |         |         (THE FILE'S GRAPHIC GOES HERE)          |  |
        |         |                                                 |  |
        |         +-------------------------------------------------+  |
        |     1   MONETADR.JPG   320w 200h 256 colours   12,345 bytes  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of5  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        Here is another sample "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level screen; 
        after an UN-successful search, for "GIFs" and *.GFX files, in 
        C:\DOS\:-

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 110 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                    View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk                    |
        |          GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
        |           Level 5 of 7 - Files (Stats & Pictures)            |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |       GIFs & *.GFX files From C:\DOS\ (DIR ONLY)       |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |          |      NO WANTED OR MATCHING FILES      |           |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |          |  There are NO `wanted' or `matching'  |           |
        |          |  files, in the currently selected     |           |
        |          |  directory (tree).  Suggestions...    |           |
        |          |  - Press /FL                          |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER DIRECTORY      |           |
        |          |      (TREE) to search (and LOAD).     |           |
        |          |  - Press Esc THREE TIMES              |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER SET OF         |           |
        |          |      FILENAME.EXTs (WANTED FILES)     |           |
        |          |      to search for.                   |           |
        |          |  - Press Esc FOUR TIMES               |           |
        |          |      To SELECT ANOTHER DRIVE.         |           |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp                   /=Menu  /Q=Quit |
        | Page1of1  [<>]=TurnPage  Backspace=PreviousView Tab=NextView |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        ================================================================
        	 OPERATING THE "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Operating the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level is pretty 
        straight-forward.
        
        The main keys used, are listed at the bottom of the screen (see 
        above).  Their use should be pretty self-explanatory.
        
        The other keys supported, but NOT listed at the bottom of the 
        screen, are:-
        
                -       1-Z = Select File
        
                -   Ctrl+F1 = Go to the PREVIOUS platform
                -   Ctrl+F2 = Go to the NEXT     platform
        
                -   Ctrl+F3 = Go to the PREVIOUS video mode
                -   Ctrl+F4 = Go to the NEXT     video mode
        
                -   Ctrl+F5 = Go to the PREVIOUS font
                -   Ctrl+F6 = Go to the NEXT     font

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 111 of 202

                -    Alt+F1 = DEcrease Blank Lines Between Directorys
                -    Alt+F2 = INcrease Blank Lines Between Directorys
        
                -    Alt+F3 = DEcrease Blank Lines Before First Block
                -    Alt+F4 = INcrease Blank Lines Before First Block
        
                -    Alt+F5 = DEcrease Blank Lines Between Blocks
                -    Alt+F6 = INcrease Blank Lines Between Blocks
        
                -    Alt+F7 = DEcrease Lines Per Block
                -    Alt+F8 = INcrease Lines Per Block
        
                -        F1 = Translation Method Down
                -        F2 = Translation Method Up
        
                -        F3 = Toggle Black & White Graphics
                -        F4 = Rotate Gray Scale Translation Method
        
                -        F5 = Toggle Colour Space
                -        F6 = -
        
                -        F7 = Toggle Graphic Window Border
                -        F8 = -
        
                -        F9 = Toggle Menu Colour Preservation
                -       F10 = Toggle Menu Colour Scheme
        
                -  Shift+F1 = DEcrease Gray Scale Levels
                -  Shift+F2 = INcrease Gray Scale Levels
        
                -  Shift+F3 = DEcrease Colour Levels
                -  Shift+F4 = INcrease Colour Levels
        
                -  Shift+F5 = DEcrease Graphic Window Border Size
                -  Shift+F6 = INcrease Graphic Window Border Size
        
                -  Shift+F7 = DEcrease Graphic Window Border Colour
                -  Shift+F8 = INcrease Graphic Window Border Colour
        
        ================================================================
                               THE "KEY SUMMARY"
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level supports a lot of keys.
        
        Fortunately, you DON'T need to memorise them all; because 
        they're ALL listed on the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level's 
        eight-page "KEY SUMMARY".
        
        To read this "Key Summary"; press /K, from the "Files (Stats & 
        Pictures)" level's main screen.
        
        If you do so, a box like the following will pop-up:-

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 112 of 202

                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |    Files (Stats & Pictures) Level    |
                    |        K E Y    S U M M A R Y        |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |              / = Menu                |
                    |             /Q = Quit                |
                    |                                      |
                    |              [ = First    Page       |
                    |              < = Previous Page       |
                    |              > = Next     Page       |
                    |              ] = Last     Page       |
                    |                                      |
                    |            Esc = Nest Up             |
                    |          Enter = Nest Down           |
                    |                                      |
                    |      Backspace = Previous View       |
                    |            Tab = Next View           |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |             Page 1 of 9              |
                    |    <=Previous   >=Next   Esc=Quit    |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  You can press any key listed on the "Key Summary", and 
               that key will be processed exactly as if you had pressed 
               it from the level's main screen.
        
               The exceptions, are the following keys, which are used by 
               the "Key Summary" itself:-
        
                        <    =  PREVIOUS page
                        >    =  NEXT     page
                        Esc  =  QUIT
        
        ================================================================
                            THE "SEARCH DETAILS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Search Details" box works exactly the same, in the "Files 
        (Stats & Pictures)" level, as it does in the "Directorys" level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                   SELECTING A FILE - TO "VIEW" OR "INSPECT"
        ================================================================
        
        If you "select" a file (by pressing the number/letter key ("1" 
        to "Z",) shown immediately before it's name), a box like the 
        following, will pop up:-

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 113 of 202

                   +----------------------------------------+
                   |               C:\MONET\                |
                   |              MONETBCH.JPG              |
                   |                                        |
                   |         What do you want to do         |
                   |            with this FILE?             |
                   |                                        |
                   |  +--------+  +-------+   +----------+  |
                   |  | V=View |  | T=Tag |   | D=Delete |  |
                   |  +--------+  +-------+   +----------+  |
                   |  +----------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
                   |  | R=Rename |  | C=Copy |  | M=Move |  |
                   |  +----------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
                   |         +--------------------+         |
                   |         | EF=EditFileComment |         |
                   |         +--------------------+         |
                   |       +-----------------------+        |
                   |       | EP=EditPictureComment |        |
                   |       +-----------------------+        |
                   |     +----------------------------+     |
                   |     | I=InspectInternalStructure |     |
                   |     +----------------------------+     |
                   |                                        |
                   |              +----------+              |
                   |              | Esc=Quit |              |
                   |              +----------+              |
                   +----------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  In the (example) box shown above, the selected file was 
               C:\MONET\MONETBCH.JPG.
        
        Press Esc, to CANCEL this box, and return to the main "Files 
        (Stats & Pictures)" level screen.
        
        This box gives you NINE options - as to what you can do with the 
        selected file.
        
        However, only TWO of those options work (*):-
        
                V = VIEW
                        Nests you down to the "Full Screen (Shorts)" 
                        level - so that you can view the selected file, 
                        full-screen.
        
                I = INSPECT INTERNAL STRUCTURE
                        Allows you to view the internal structure of a 
                        GIF file.
        
                        See the section that describes the "INSPECT 
                        INTERNAL STRUCTURE" option, in the Chapter that 
                        describes the "FILES (STATS ONLY)" level, for 
                        more details.
        
        (*) The remaining options (those that DON'T work), don't work 
            because they haven't been implemented yet (as of GUF version 
            1c).  I'll fire them up, in later versions.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 114 of 202

        ================================================================
                                TURNING THE PAGE
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, occupies as many pages as 
        are required to list the wanted and matching files found.
        
        To move through the pages, use the standard page turning keys:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    page
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS page
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     page
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     page.
        
        ================================================================
                    CHANGING THE LEVEL (NESTING UP AND DOWN)
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, is level 5.
        
                     Level 1  =  Drives
                     Level 2  =  Wanted Files
                     Level 3  =  Directorys
                     Level 4  =  FILES (STATS ONLY)        (Esc)
                -->  Level 5  =  Files (Stats & Pictures)
                     Level 6  =  FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)      (Enter)
                     Level 7  =  Full Screen (Originals)
        
        Esc nests you up, to the "FILES (STATS ONLY)" level.
        
        Enter nests you down, to the "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" level.
        
        ================================================================
                               CHANGING THE VIEW
        ================================================================
        
        GUF, version 1c, supports only 1 "View".
        
        So, the view changing keys:-
        
                Backspace  =  Go to the PREVIOUS view
        and;    Tab        =  Go to the NEXT     view,
        
        DON'T WORK.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 115 of 202

        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        To quit GUF, from the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level:-
        
                        -  Press /  -  to invoke the Main Menu
        
        and then;       -  Press Q  -  to Quit.
        
        Once you have done this, you will be returned to the program 
        from which you called GUF (usually either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
        or; Windows).
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "MAIN MENU"
        ================================================================
        
        Press /, to activate the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level's 
        "Main Menu":-
        
          +---------------------------------------------------------+
          |                           GUF                           |
          |           Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer           |
          |                Version 1c - 16 July 1998                |
          |              (C) 1998 Red Flower Computers              |
          |                   All Rights Reserved                   |
          |                                                         |
          |  +---------------------------------------------------+  |
          |  |                     MAIN MENU                     |  |
          |  +---------------------------------------------------+  |
          |                                                         |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |    FL=Find & Load Files    |  B=Batch Operations  |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |        SU=Set-Up           |      SH=Shorts       |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |             -              |       L=Longs        |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |  V=Toggle Video Modes Box  |          -           |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |    FO=Toggle Fonts Box     |    K=Key Summary     |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |             -              |    U=User Manual     |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |        A=All Boxes         |    R=Registration    |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |      D=Default Boxes       |          -           |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |  |         N=No Boxes         |        Q=Quit        |  |
          |  +----------------------------+----------------------+  |
          |                 +----------------------+                |
          |                 |  Esc=CancelMainMenu  |                |
          |                 +----------------------+                |
          +---------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 116 of 202

        Press Esc, to CANCEL this menu, and return to the main "Files 
        (Stats & Pictures)" level screen.
        
        This menu lists a number of options; but NOT all them work.
        
        The options that DON'T work, are:-
        
                B  = BATCH OPERATIONS
        
        The options that DO work, are:-
        
                FL = FIND & LOAD FILES (*)
                        Allows you to select another directory (tree) to 
                        load the wanted and/or matching files from.
        
                SU = SET-UP ($)
                        Allows you to configure the "Files (Stats & 
                        Pictures" level screen (by setting things like 
                        the graphic window border colour and size, for 
                        example).
        
                V  = TOGGLE VIDEO MODES BOX (#)
                        Toggles the "Video Modes" box, ON and OFF.
        
                FO = TOGGLE FONTS BOX (#)
                        Toggles the "Fonts" box, ON and OFF.
        
                A  = ALL BOXES (#)
                        Toggles all the available boxes ON and OFF.
        
                D  = DEFAULT BOXES (#)
                        Turns the default boxes ON, and all the other 
                        boxes OFF.
        
                N  = NO BOXES (#)
                        Turns ALL the boxes OFF.
        
                SH = SHORTS
                        Calls up the "Shorts" function; that you use to 
                        create and delete "shorts".  The "Shorts" 
                        function is quite complex - and is described in 
                        it's own separate Chapter, below.
        
                L  = LONGS
                        Calls up the "Longs" function; that you use to 
                        create and delete "longs".  The "Longs" function 
                        is quite complex - and is described in it's own 
                        separate Chapter, below.
        
                K  = KEY SUMMARY
                        Displays a multi-page list, of ALL the keys 
                        supported by the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" 
                        level, and what they do.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 117 of 202

                R  = REGISTRATION
                        Displays the screens that summarise the 
                        Shareware nature of GUF, and it's registration 
                        cost.
        
                Q  = QUIT
                        Quits GUF (without any further confirmation), 
                        and returns you to the program from which you 
                        called GUF (usually, either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
                        or; Windows).
        
        (*)  This option is described in more detail, in the section 
             entitled "THE "FIND & LOAD FILES" OPTION", below.
        
        ($)  This option is described in more detail, in the section 
             entitled "THE "SET-UP" OPTION", below.
        
        (#)  These options are described in more detail, in the section 
             entitled "THE "VIDEO MODES" & "FONTS" BOXES", below.
        
        ================================================================
                       THE "VIDEO MODES" & "FONTS" BOXES
        ================================================================
        
        The "Video Modes" and "Fonts" boxes, work exactly the same, in 
        the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, as they do in the 
        "Directorys" level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                         THE "FIND & LOAD FILES" OPTION
        ================================================================
        
        The "FL=FIND & LOAD FILES" option works exactly the same, in the 
        "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, as it does in the "Directorys" 
        level.
        
        See the corresponding Section, in the Chapter describing the 
        "Directorys" level, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                              THE "SET-UP" OPTION
        ================================================================
        
        The "SET-UP" option, allows you to configure the "Files (Stats 
        & Pictures)" level screen, and to review the current settings.
        
        When you invoke the option - by pressing /SU, from the main 
        "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level screen - the following 
        (four-page) box will pop-up.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 118 of 202

                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |     Files (Stats & Pictures) Level    |
                   |              S E T - U P              |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |  COLOUR SPACE...                      |
                   |    * LUV                   (default)  |
                   |      RGB                              |
                   |    F5=Toggle                          |
                   |                                       |
                   |  GRAY SCALE TRANSLATION METHOD...     |
                   |    * Weighted Average      (default)  |
                   |      Average                          |
                   |      Nearest Neighbour                |
                   |    F4=Rotate                          |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |              Page 1 of 4              |
                   |  <=Previous    >=Next       Esc=Quit  |
                   +---------------------------------------+
        
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |     Files (Stats & Pictures) Level    |
                   |              S E T - U P              |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |  GRAPHIC WINDOW BORDER...             |
                   |    * On                    (default)  |
                   |      Off                              |
                   |    F7=Toggle                          |
                   |                                       |
                   |  GRAPHIC WINDOW BORDER SIZE...        |
                   |  (In 640w x 480h Mode Pixels; 1-255)  |
                   |  (Default=8)                          |
                   |    -->  8                             |
                   |    Shift+F5=Decrease                  |
                   |    Shift+F6=Increase                  |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |              Page 2 of 4              |
                   |  <=Previous    >=Next       Esc=Quit  |
                   +---------------------------------------+

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 119 of 202

                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |     Files (Stats & Pictures) Level    |
                   |              S E T - U P              |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |  GRAPHIC WINDOW BORDER COLOUR...      |
                   |  (Default=Black)                      |
                   |    -->  Black        ###############  |
                   |    - Black - Blue - Green - Cyan      |
                   |    - Red - Purple - Brown - Gray      |
                   |    - DarkGray - LightBlue             |
                   |    - LightGreen - LightCyan           |
                   |    - LightRed - LightPurple           |
                   |    - Yellow - White                   |
                   |    Shift+F7=Previous                  |
                   |    Shift+F8=Next                      |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |              Page 3 of 4              |
                   |  <=Previous    >=Next       Esc=Quit  |
                   +---------------------------------------+
        
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |     Files (Stats & Pictures) Level    |
                   |              S E T - U P              |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |  PRESERVE MENU COLOURS?               |
                   |    * Yes                   (default)  |
                   |      No                               |
                   |    F9=Toggle                          |
                   |                                       |
                   |  MENU COLOUR SCHEME...                |
                   |    * Colour                (default)  |
                   |      Black & White                    |
                   |    F10=Toggle                         |
                   +---------------------------------------+
                   |              Page 4 of 4              |
                   |  <=Previous    >=Next       Esc=Quit  |
                   +---------------------------------------+
        
        Operating the box should be pretty much self-explanatory.  The 
        keys used, are all listed on-screen.
        
        NOTE!  The keys used to adjust the settings, are the SAME keys 
               as are used to adjust the settings interactively, from 
               the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, main screen.
        
               So, if you want to adjust these settings interactively - 
               so that you can see the results immediately - you can do 
               so, by pressing the exact same keys, from the "Files 
               (Stats & Pictures)" level main screen.
        
        The settings that you can review and adjust are:-
        
                COLOUR SPACE
                ------------
                        Selects the method used to compare colours.
                        Also, selects the (video mode default) palette 
                        used.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 120 of 202

                        However, the LUV colour comparison method is NOT 
                        implemented yet.  So, all colour comparisons are 
                        RGB (that is; the difference between two 
                        colours, is the magnitude of the vector that 
                        spans their respective locations, in RGB space).
        
                        Thus, in GUF, version 1c, adjusting the color
                        space has no effect, apart from selecting the 
                        video mode default palette used.
        
                        Basically, you should forget about adjusting the 
                        colour space - in GUF version 1c at least.  I'll
                        implement the thing properly, in later versions.
        
                        NOTE!  The colour space defaults to LUV.  But, 
                               irrespective of which colour space is 
                               chosen, all colour comparisons are RGB.
        
                GRAY SCALE TRANSLATION METHOD
                -----------------------------
                        Selects the method used to convert RGB colour 
                        triples, to their gray scale equivalents.
        
                        Three methods are supported:-
        
                        "WEIGHTED AVERAGE"
                                Translates the RGB colour triple:-
                                        ( red , green , blue )
                                to a shade of gray, given by the RGB 
                                triple:-
                                        ( gray , gray , gray )
                                where:-
                                        gray = ( 30% red + 59% green + 
                                                 11% blue )
        
                        "AVERAGE"
                                We just add the red, green and blue 
                                components, and divide the result by 
                                three.
        
                        "NEAREST NEIGHBOUR"
                                Translates the RGB colour triple:-
                                        ( red , green , blue )
                                to the shade of gray, closest to it, in 
                                RGB space.
        
                        The DEFAULT method, is "Weighted Average".  In 
                        theory (and usually in practice), this method 
                        gives the best results.
        
                        (This is because, it takes account of the fact 
                        that the human eye is more sensitive to blue, 
                        than it is to red, than it is to green.  Thus, 
                        to get what appears to be a equal amount of 
                        each, you need more green, than you do red, than 
                        you do blue.)

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 121 of 202

                        I only implemented the other methods, out of
                        curiosity.  They both seem reasonable methods of 
                        translating a colour value to a shade of gray. 
        
                        The "Weighted Average" method is theoretically 
                        better, but in practice, you'll see that it 
                        rarely makes MUCH difference.  Nine times out of 
                        ten, however, the "Weighted Average" method does 
                        seem to do a (slightly) better job.
        
                GRAPHIC WINDOW BORDER
                ---------------------
                        A "graphic window", is the window, on the "Files 
                        (Stats & Pictures)" level, in which a file's 
                        graphic is displayed.
        
                        You can display the graphic in this window, 
                        either with or without a border.
        
                        If the border is enabled, a border, "graphic 
                        window border size" pixels wide (see below), 
                        will be left INSIDE the graphic window.  The 
                        file's graphic, will then be displayed on this 
                        smaller window within.
        
                        NOTE!  The border so created, is a minimum 1 
                               pixel wide, and is "graphic window border 
                               colour" coloured.
        
                        You can set the border ON or OFF, depending on 
                        whether or not you think it improves the 
                        appearance of the displayed graphics.
        
                        By DEFAULT, the border is ON.
        
                GRAPHIC WINDOW BORDER SIZE
                --------------------------
                        Defines the width of the "graphic window border" 
                        (see above), in pixels.
        
                GRAPHIC WINDOW BORDER COLOUR
                ----------------------------
                        Defines the BACKGROUND COLOUR, to which the 
                        "graphic window" (see above) is set (cleared), 
                        before the graphic proper is drawn.
        
                        As a result, if the "graphic window border" is 
                        enabled, it also will appear in this colour.
        
                PRESERVE MENU COLOURS?
                ----------------------
                        Defines whether or not the menu colours should 
                        be preserved, when the graphic is displayed.

        Chapter 14: "Files (Stats & Pictures)" Level --- Page 122 of 202

                        The DEFAULT is YES.  This ensures that the 
                        "menus" (see below), are always readable.
        
                        If you set this to NO, then there are more 
                        colours available to display the graphic in.  
                        The result, is (usually) a noticeable 
                        improvement in the quality of the displayed 
                        graphic - though the "menus" may become partly 
                        or totally unreadable.
        
                        However, once you're familar with the standard 
                        screen set-up and the page turning keys (etc), 
                        this menu un-readability will probably not be 
                        much of a problem.  It's a trade-off, but the 
                        picture quality improvement (usually) makes it 
                        worthwhile.
        
                        (Even if menu un-readabilty is a problem, the F9 
                        key toggles menu colour presevation ON and OFF, 
                        so you can quickly restore the menu colours, if 
                        you need them.)
        
                        NOTE!  On the "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level, 
                               the file graphics are drawn in windows 
                               (immediately above each file's 
                               FILENAME.EXT and size data).
        
                               Surrounding the windows are the screen 
                               background material; the screen header 
                               and footer, etc.  This stuff, I refer to 
                               as the "menus".
        
                MENU COLOUR SCHEME
                ------------------
                        Allows you to select between "Colour" (the 
                        DEFAULT) or "Black & White" menus.
        
                        "Black & White" menus use less colours (2) than 
                        "Colour" menus, so, if "menu colour presevation" 
                        is ON, there are more colours to draw the 
                        graphic with.
        
                        The result, is better quality graphics - with 
                        the the menus remaining readable (even if they 
                        are in boring old black & white).
        
                        NOTE!  "Black & White" menus are NOT YET 
                               IMPLEMENTED.  So, as of GUF version 1, 
                               toggling the menu colour scheme doesn't 
                               work.  The menu colour scheme defaults to 
                               "Colour", and you can't change it.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 123 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 15                         ##
        ##              THE "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL              ## 
        ################################################################
        
        The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, displays a SINGLE (graphic) 
        file - either; the SHORT (if the file has one), or; the SOURCE 
        FILE or LONG (if it does not).
        
        The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level also allows you to SCROLL 
        around the graphic (if the graphic is too big for the screen).
        
        ================================================================
                                 SCREEN LAYOUT
        ================================================================
        
        A typical "Full Screen (Shorts)" level screen, looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                 +--------------------------+                 |
        |       +---------+  View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk  +--------+        |
        |       |  GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer  |        |
        |       +--+  Level 6 of 7 - Full Screen (Shorts)  +--+        |
        |          +---------------------------------------+           |
        |                                                              |
        |                       +-----------------------------------+  |
        |                       |             C:\MONET\             |  |
        |                       |        Graphic File 1 of 5        |  |
        |                       |  [=First  <=Prev  >=Next  ]=Last  |  |
        |                       |            MONETBCH.JPG           |  |
        |                       |           (GIF00001.KRT)          |  |
        |                       +-----------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |                                                              |
        |                                                              |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  | Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp  Spacebar=+/-PopUps         |  |
        |  |                            P=+/-PopUpsPalette  /=Menu  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  The "Keys" box (shown at the bottom of the above screen), 
               is ACTUALLY only ONE line high.
        
        On the "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, the graphic is painted onto 
        the screen first.  Then, any enabled "pop-up" boxes, are painted 
        over the graphic.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 124 of 202

        The "pop-up" boxes are OPTIONAL - and they can be individually
        enabled and disabled.  The enabled "pop-up" boxes are painted 
        around the edges of the screen (at either the top right, or the 
        bottom), so as to minimise the amount of the graphic that they 
        hide.
        
        These features ensure that ALL of the screen is available for 
        the display of the graphic.  And, even if; a) the graphic is too 
        big for the screen, and/or; b) "pop-up" boxes are required, at 
        least you can see as much of the graphic as possible.
        
        NOTE!  You can also use the Spacebar key, to quickly toggle all 
               the (enabled) "pop-up" boxes OFF and ON.
        
        ================================================================
                               THE "POP-UP" BOXES
        ================================================================
        
        In order to make ALL of the screen available for display of the 
        graphic, any ancilliary information (like; the keys to press, 
        and; the name of the file being displayed, etc), that would 
        otherwise have to occupy screen area around the graphic, is 
        placed in "pop-up" boxes, that, if enabled, are positioned over 
        the graphic, round the edges of the screen.
        
        To minimise the disruptive effect of these boxes even further:-
                a)  They can be individually enabled and disabled (so
                    that you only have to display those that you need),
        and;    b)  Any enabled boxes can be quickly toggled OFF and ON, 
                    with the Spacebar key.
        
        There are SEVEN such "pop-up" boxes:-
        
        	-  (*)	"HEADER"      Box
        	-	"Scroll Keys" Box
        	-  (*)	"FILES"       Box
        	-	"Video Modes" Box
        	-	"Fonts"       Box
        	-	"Stats"       Box
        	-  (*)	"KEYS"        Box
        
        These boxes are described individually, below.
        
        NOTES!
        ------
        
        1.  The boxes marked with an asterisk (*) - the "HEADER", 
            "FILES" and "KEYS" boxes - default ON (as shown in the 
            example "SCREEN LAYOUT", above).  (These boxes contain 
            frequently used information.)
        
        2.  The OTHER boxes default OFF.  They contain less frequently 
            used information (which you can request, if you need it).

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 125 of 202

        3.  As well as the primary information that each box provides, 
            these boxes also LIST any related KEYS.  For example;
        	  -  the "Files" box, lists the "page turning" keys
                     (used to move through the pages/files),
            and;  -  the "Video Modes" box, lists the keys used to
                     interactively switch video modes.
        
            So, if you forget which keys to use, just enable the 
            appropriate box.
        
        4.  The boxes are ENABLED and DISABLED from the "MAIN MENU".
            (To invoke the "MAIN MENU", press /.)
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "HEADER" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Header" box shows the PROGRAM TITLE (GUF) - and also shows
        the currently selected VIEW and LEVEL.
        
        For example:-
        
        		  +--------------------------+
        	+---------+  View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk  +--------+
                |  GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer  |
        	+--+  Level 6 of 7 - Full Screen (Shorts)  +--+
        	   +---------------------------------------+
        
        If enabled, the "Header" box appears at the top center of the 
        screen.
        
        ================================================================
        		     THE "SCROLL KEYS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Scroll Keys" box LISTS the SCROLL KEYS.
        
        For example:-
        
            +----------------+-------------+------------------+-------+
            |  Home=TopLeft  |    T=Top    |  PgUp=TopRight   |   ^   |
            +----------------+-------------+------------------+---+---+
            |     L=Left     |  C=Center   |     R=Right      | < | > |
            +----------------+-------------+------------------+---+---+
            | End=BottomLeft |  B=Bottom   | PgDn=BottomRight |   v   |
            +----------------+-------------+------------------+-------+
            |  H=Centre<->   | V=Centre^|v |  M=MicroModeON   | Shift |
            +----------------+--------------------------------+-------+
        
        If enabled, the "Scroll Keys" box appears at the top right of 
        the screen - immediately under the "Header" box.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 126 of 202

        ================================================================
        			THE "FILES" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Files" box, lists:-
        
        	a)  The source file's (and short's) DIRECTORY NAME\
        
        	b)  The SOURCE FILE'S FILENAME.EXT
        
        	c)  The FILENAME.EXT (in brackets,) of the file actually 
        	    displayed.	(The file actually displayed, will be 
        	    either; the SHORT (if there is a short), or; the 
        	    SOURCE FILE (if there is NO short).)
        
                d)  The NUMBER of (SOURCE) FILES there are to display - 
                    together with the displayed files index number 
                    (1-N), in the list of files to be displayed
        
        and;    e)  The "page turning" KEYS, used to move through the
        	    files.
        
        For example:-
        
             +---------------------------------------------------+
             |                     C:\MONET\                     |
             |                Graphic File 1 of 5                |
             |  +---------+  +--------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
             |  | [=First |  | <=Prev |  | >=Next |  | ]=Last |  |
             |  +---------+  +--------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
             |                    MONETBCH.JPG                   |
             |                   (GIF00001.KRT)                  |
             +---------------------------------------------------+
        
        In this example:-
        
        	-  Both the short and the source file come from (the 
        	   DIRECTORY); C:\MONET\
        
        	-  The SOURCE FILE is; C:\MONET\MONETBCH.JPG
        
        	-  The file ACTUALLY DISPLAYED is; C:\MONET\GIF00001.KRT 
        	   (which is a short; you can tell this from it's 
        	   "GIF?????.KRT" FILENAME.EXT).
        
        	-  There are FIVE source files, and the displayed source
        	   file is the FIRST of these.
        
        Here is another example:-

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 127 of 202

             +---------------------------------------------------+
             |                    C:\DOWNLOAD\                   |
             |               Graphic File 5 of 100               |
             |  +---------+  +--------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
             |  | [=First |  | <=Prev |  | >=Next |  | ]=Last |  |
             |  +---------+  +--------+  +--------+  +--------+  |
             |                    BARTCLR.GIF                    |
             |                   (BARTCLR.GIF)                   |
             +---------------------------------------------------+
        
        In this example:-
        
        	-  The source file comes from (the DIRECTORY); 
        	   C:\DOWNLOAD\
        
        	-  The SOURCE FILE is; C:\DOWNLOAD\BARTCLR.GIF
        
        	-  The file ACTUALLY DISPLAYED is; 
        	   C:\DOWNLOAD\BARTCLR.GIF (which means that there is NO 
        	   short; since it is the source file that was 
        	   displayed.
        
        	-  There are ONE HUNDRED source files, and the displayed 
        	   source file is the FIFTH of these.
        
        If enabled, the "Files" box appears at the top right of the 
        screen - immediately under the "Scroll Keys" box.
        
        ================================================================
        		     THE "VIDEO MODES" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Video Modes" box, shows the currently selected video mode.  
        
        It also lists the keys used to change the video mode.
        
        For example:-
        
                       +--------------------------------+
                       |       BIOS Video Mode 18       |
                       |  +-------------+  +---------+  |
                       |  | F3=Previous |  | F4=Next |  |
                       |  +-------------+  +---------+  |
                       |         +-----------+          |
                       |         | O=Optimum |          |
                       |         +-----------+          |
                       |     VGA 640x480 16colours      |
                       +--------------------------------+
        
        In this example, the graphic is being displayed in; BIOS video 
        mode number 18 - which is the VGA, 640w x 480h, 16 colour video 
        mode.
        
        If enabled, the "Video Modes" box appears at the top right of 
        the screen - immediately under the "Files" box.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 128 of 202

        NOTES!
        ------
        
        1.  THE "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL SUPPORTS FIVE VIDEO MODES:-
        
                BIOS video mode# 13:  EGA 320x200  16colours
                BIOS video mode# 14:  EGA 640x200  16colours
                BIOS video mode# 16:  EGA 640x350  16colours
                BIOS video mode# 18:  VGA 640x480  16colours
                BIOS video mode# 19:  VGA 320x200 256colours
        
            In other words, it supports all (five) of the EGA/VGA colour 
            graphics modes.
        
        2.  A GRAPHIC IS ALWAYS DISPLAYED IN THE SMALLEST VIDEO MODE IN
            WHICH THE GRAPHIC WILL FIT.
        
            The logic used to select this "optimum" video mode, is:-
        
            A)  If the graphic has MORE THAN 16 colours...
                        -->  BIOS video mode# 19
                             (VGA 320x200 256 colours)
        
            (From now on, all graphics have 16 colours or less.)
        
            B)  If the graphic is NO LARGER than 320w x 200h...
                        -->  BIOS video mode# 13
                             (EGA 320x200 16colours)
        
            C)  If the graphic is NO LARGER than 640w x 200h...
                        -->  BIOS video mode# 14
                             (EGA 640x200 16colours)
        
            D)  If the graphic is NO LARGER than 640w x 350h...
                        -->  BIOS video mode# 16
                             (EGA 640x350 16colours)
        
            E)  Otherwise...
                        -->  BIOS video mode# 18
                             (VGA 640x480 16colours)
        
            This logic ensures that:-
        
                a)  Small graphics are as large (and thus, as easy to
                    see,) as possible,
        
                b)  Graphics that fit one of the supported video modes 
                    exactly (which are not un-common), are displayed on 
                    the corresponding video mode.  (For example, a 
                    640x350x16 graphic, will be displayed on the EGA 
                    640x350 16 colour video mode.), and;
        
                c)  Large graphics are displayed on the highest 
                    resolution video mode available (so that we get as 
                    much as possible on the screen).

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 129 of 202

        3.  IF THE GRAPHIC BEING DISPLAYED HAS 16 COLOURS OR LESS, YOU 
            CAN USE THE F3 AND F4 KEYS, TO DISPLAY IT IN ANY OF THE 
            OTHER (16 AND 256 COLOUR) VIDEO MODES SUPPORTED.
        
            I don't know if this is particularly useful, but the two 
            main uses are:-
        
            A)  If you switch from a high resolution mode (eg; VGA 
                640x480 16 colours) to a lower resolution mode (eg; EGA 
                320x200 16 colours), you get a "zooming" effect.  The 
                graphic will be larger (and therefore, in most cases,
                easier to see).
        
            B)  Changing the video mode, changes the displayed graphic's 
                aspect ratio.  For example, a 640x350x16 graphic would 
                normally be displayed in the EGA 640x350 16 colour video 
                mode, in which it would occupy the entire screen.
        
                If you switch to the VGA 640x480 16colour video mode, 
                the graphic will still occupy the full screen width, but 
                not the full-screen height.  It will appear to be a 
                little bit flattened (as though someone had either; 
                stomped on it, or; grabbed it from both sides, and 
                pulled).
        
                Thus, changing the video mode will distort the graphic, 
                which can be a bit of fun.
        
                However, since the logic used to select the "optimum" 
                video mode (to display the graphic in), does NOT take 
                account of the graphic's true aspect ratio, changing the 
                video mode also allows you to correct any errors that 
                may result.
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "FONTS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Fonts" box, shows the currently selected font.
        
        It also lists the keys used to change the font.
        
        For example:-
        
                       +--------------------------------+
                       |          Font 1 of 3           |
                       |  +-------------+  +---------+  |
                       |  | F3=Previous |  | F4=Next |  |
                       |  +-------------+  +---------+  |
                       |            BIOS 8x8            |
                       +--------------------------------+
        
        In this example, the currently selected font, is the (ROM) BIOS 
        8x8 font.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 130 of 202

        If enabled, the "Fonts" box appears at the top right of the 
        screen - immediately under the "Video Modes" box.
        
        NOTES!
        ------
        
        1.  THE "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL SUPPORTS THREE FONTS:-
        
                Font# 1:  ROM BIOS 8x8
                Font# 2:  ROM BIOS 8x14
                Font# 3:  ROM BIOS 8x16
        
            These fonts are all 8 pixels wide, and either 8, 14 or 16 
            pixels high.  They are all "built-in" - to the "video BIOS"; 
            found on any standard VGA or SVGA card.  Thus, they don't 
            require any installation or set-up (by you); that's already 
            done.
        
            Changing the font, changes both; the physical size (height) 
            of any text displayed (on the pop-up boxes and menus, etc), 
            and; the number of text lines per screen.
        
            More specifically, changing the font changes the size 
            (height) of any displayed pop-up boxes.  Thus, it changes 
            the amount of the graphic, that the displayed pop-up boxes 
            hide.  A smaller font hides less, but, being smaller, may be 
            more difficult to read.
        
        2.  THE FOLLOWING TABLE LISTS THE VIDEO MODES AND FONTS
            SUPPORTED BY THE "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL, AND THE
            NUMBER OF TEXT LINES PER SCREEN THAT RESULT:-
        
                BIOS Video Mode 13 - EGA 320x200 16 colours
                         8x8 font:  25 lines per screen
                        8x14 font:  14   "    "    "
                        8x16 font:  12   "    "    "
        
                BIOS Video Mode 14 - EGA 640x200 16 colours
                         8x8 font:  25 lines per screen
                        8x14 font:  14   "    "    "
                        8x16 font:  12   "    "    "
        
                BIOS Video Mode 16 - EGA 640x350 16 colours
                         8x8 font:  43 lines per screen
                        8x14 font:  25   "    "    "
                        8x16 font:  21   "    "    "
        
                BIOS Video Mode 18 - VGA 640x480 16 colours
                         8x8 font:  60 lines per screen
                        8x14 font:  34   "    "    "
                        8x16 font:  25   "    "    "
        
                BIOS Video Mode 19 - VGA 320x200 256 colours
                         8x8 font:  25 lines per screen
                        8x14 font:  14   "    "    "
                        8x16 font:  12   "    "    "

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 131 of 202

        3.  THE DEFAULT FONTS ASSOCIATED WITH EACH VIDEO MODE (BY GUF), 
            ARE AS FOLLOWS:-
        
                Mode 13 (EGA 320x200  16 clrs):   8x8 (25 lines/screen)
                Mode 14 (EGA 640x200  16 clrs):   8x8 (25   "     "   )
                Mode 16 (EGA 640x350  16 clrs):   8x8 (43   "     "   )
                Mode 18 (VGA 640x480  16 clrs):  8x14 (34   "     "   )
                Mode 19 (VGA 320x200 256 clrs):   8x8 (25   "     "   )
        
            NOTE!  The default font associated with each video mode by 
                   the "video BIOS", is the font that results in 25 text 
                   lines per screen.  GUF overrides these defaults 
                   (where possible), to make the "pop-up" boxes as small 
                   as possible (without making them too difficult to 
                   read).
        
        ================================================================
                                THE "STATS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Stats" box, shows the following data (for the displayed 
        file):-
        
                -  GIF Signature & Version Number  (If it's a GIF file)
                                                   (See also below)
                -  Width                           (In pixels)
                -  Height                          (In pixels)
                -  Number of Colours
                -  File Size                       (In bytes)
        
        For example:-
        
                              +-----------------+
                              |      GIF87a     |
                              |    640w 350h    |
                              |    16 colours   |
                              |   12,345 bytes  |
                              +-----------------+
        
        NOTE!  The top line, which gives the GIF signature and version 
               number, only appears if the source file is a GIF file.
        
        If enabled, the "Stats" box appears at the top right of the 
        screen - immediately under the "Fonts" box.
        
        NOTES!
        ------
        
        1.  The GIF Signature and Version Number data, is the actual 
            contents of the first 6 bytes of the GIF file.  It should be 
            either "GIF87a" or "GIF89a"; depending on the GIF file 
            specification to which the GIF file conforms.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 132 of 202

        ================================================================
                                 THE "KEYS" BOX
        ================================================================
        
        The "Keys" box lists the main keys supported by the "Full Screen 
        (Shorts)" level.
        
        For example:-
        
           +--------------------------------------------------------+
           |  Enter=NestDown  Esc=NestUp  Spacebar=+/-PopUps        |
           |                            P=+/-PopUpsPalette  /=Menu  |
           +--------------------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTE!  The "Keys" box is ACTUALLY only ONE line high.
        
        If enabled, the "Keys" box appears centered, one line above the 
        BOTTOM of the screen.
        
        ================================================================
                   OPERATING THE "FULL SCREEN (SHORTS)" LEVEL
        ================================================================
        
        Operating the "Full Screen (Shorts)" level is pretty 
        straight-forward.
        
        The keys supported are:-
        
                       /  =  MAIN MENU
                                 (See below)
        
                     Esc  =  Nest UP   to the PREVIOUS level
                   Enter  =  Nest DOWN to the NEXT     level
        
                       [  =  Go to the FIRST    page/file
                       <  =  Go to the PREVIOUS page/file
                       >  =  Go to the NEXT     page/file
                       ]  =  Go to the LAST     page/file
                                 The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level
                                 displays ONE file per page/screen.
                                 The standard page turning keys, allow
                                 you to browse through the loaded
                                 files.
        
                      F3  =  Go to the PREVIOUS video mode
                      F4  =  Go to the NEXT     video mode
        
                      F5  =  Go to the PREVIOUS font
                      F6  =  Go to the NEXT     font

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 133 of 202

                Spacebar  =  Toggles the POP-UP boxes ON/OFF
                                 Hides and shows the enabled pop-up
                                 boxes.  Useful, if you want to
                                 quickly clear the pop-up boxes off
                                 the screen, so that you can see the
                                 graphic underneath.
        
                       P  =  Switch PALETTE
                                 (See below)
        
        The following keys move the screen/graphic - to the indicated 
        position on the graphic/screen:-
        
                    Home  =  TOP    LEFT
                     End  =  BOTTOM LEFT
        
                    PgUp  =  TOP    RIGHT
                    PgDn  =  BOTTOM RIGHT
        
                       T  =  TOP
                       B  =  BOTTOM
        
                       L  =  FAR LEFT
                       R  =  FAR RIGHT
        
                       C  =  CENTRE
        
                       H  =  HORIZONTAL CENTRE
                       V  =  VERTICAL   CENTRE
        
        The following screens scroll the screen/graphic, around the 
        graphic/screen (at a "Micro Mode" ON/OFF dependent speed):-
        
                         UpArrow = UP    Normal speed
                   Shift+UpArrow = UP    Fast
        
                       DownArrow = DOWN  Normal speed
                 Shift+DownArrow = DOWN  Fast
        
                       LeftArrow = LEFT  Normal speed
                 Shift+LeftArrow = LEFT  Fast
        
                      RightArrow = RIGHT Normal speed
                Shift+RightArrow = RIGHT Fast
        
        where:-
        
                              M  =  Toggle MICRO MODE
        
        is used to toggle "Micro Mode" (pixel by pixel scrolling ON/OFF.
        
        The screen/graphic movement and scrolling keys, are described in 
        more detail below.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 134 of 202

        ================================================================
                               P = TOGGLE PALETTE
        ================================================================
        
        When displaying a graphic on the screen, there are TWO choices, 
        as to the palette to be used:-
        
                THE GRAPHIC'S PALETTE
                        This is the palette supplied with the graphic 
                        being displayed.
        
                        Obviously, this palette must be used, if the 
                        graphic is to be displayed in the correct 
                        colours.
        
                THE "MENU" PALETTE
                        This is the palette used for the pop-up boxes 
                        (and the menu's, etc).
        
                        Obviously, this palette must be used, if the 
                        pop-up boxes are to be displayed in the correct 
                        colours.
        
        We assume that (when using the "Full Screen (Shorts)" level), 
        you most likely want to look at the GRAPHIC (as opposed to the 
        pop-up boxes).  So, we select the GRAPHIC's palette, by DEFAULT.
        
        However, this MAY make the pop-up boxes difficult (or even 
        impossible) to read.  If this occurs, just press:-
        
                P  =  Switch PALETTE
        
        to select the "MENU" palette.
        
        You will then be able to read the pop-up boxes (though the 
        graphic MAY then become difficult or impossible to see).
        
        ================================================================
                    SCROLLING AROUND THE GRAPHIC (OR SCREEN)
        ================================================================
        
        When displaying a graphic, full-screen (as we do on the "Full 
        Screen (Shorts)" level), there are FIVE situations that can 
        arise:-
        
                THE SCREEN AND GRAPHIC ARE THE SAME SIZE...
                        In this case, the screen/graphic movement and 
                        scrolling keys do NOT work.
        
                THE GRAPHIC IS LARGER THAN THE SCREEN...
                        Ie:-

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 135 of 202

                        +----------------- (GRAPHIC) ------------------+
                        |                                              |
                        |               +== (SCREEN) ==+               |
                        |               |              |               |
                        |               +==============+               |
                        |                                              |
                        +----------------------------------------------+
        
                        When this occurs, we first draw the screen at 
                        the CENTRE of the graphic (because, with most 
                        graphics, this is where the most 
                        important/interesting information is located).  
        
        		You can then use the screen movement and 
        		scrolling keys; to move the screen to any corner 
        		of the graphic, and anywhere in-between.  Ie:-
        
        		+== (SCREEN) ==+-- (GRAPHIC) ---+== (SCREEN) ==+
        		|	       |		|	       |
        		+==============+		+==============+
                        |                                              |
        		+== (SCREEN) ==+		+== (SCREEN) ==+
        		|	       |		|	       |
        		+==============+----------------+==============+
        
                THE GRAPHIC IS SMALLER THAN THE SCREEN...
                        Ie:-
        
                        +================== (SCREEN) ==================+
                        |                                              |
                        |           +----- (GRAPHIC) ------+           |
                        |           |                      |           |
                        |           +----------------------+           |
                        |                                              |
                        +==============================================+
        
                        When this occurs, we first draw the graphic at 
                        the CENTRE of the screen (where you will see all 
                        of the graphic - apart from anything covered by 
                        the enabled pop-up boxes).
        
        		You can then use the screen movement and 
        		scrolling keys; to move the graphic to any 
        		corner of the screen, and anywhere in-between.	
        		Ie:-
        
        		+= (GRAPHIC) ==+--- (SCREEN) ---+= (GRAPHIC) ==+
        		|	       |		|	       |
        		+==============+		+==============+
                        |                                              |
        		+= (GRAPHIC) ==+		+= (GRAPHIC) ==+
        		|	       |		|	       |
        		+==============+----------------+==============+

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 136 of 202

                THE GRAPHIC IS WIDER - BUT NOT TALLER - THAN THE 
                SCREEN...
                        Ie:-
        
        			    +====== (SCREEN) ======+
        			    |			   |
        		+-----------+----- (GRAPHIC) ------+-----------+
                        |           |                      |           |
        		+-----------+----------------------+-----------+
        			    |			   |
        			    +======================+
        
                        When this occurs, we first draw the graphic at 
                        the CENTRE of the screen.
        
        		You can then use the screen movement and 
        		scrolling keys; to move the screen around the 
        		graphic, and the graphic around the screen.  
        		Ie:-
        
                        +======================+------ (GRAPHIC) ------+
                        |                      |                       |
                        +----------------------+-----------------------+
        		|		       |	   ||
        		|		       | ==========++==========>
        		|		       |	   ||
        		+====== (SCREEN) ======+	   \/
        
        			   /\	       +====== (SCREEN) ======+
        			   ||	       |		      |
        		<==========++========= |		      |
        			   ||	       |		      |
                        +----------------------+----------------------+
                        |                      |                      |
                        +----- (GRAPHIC) ------+======================+
        
        	THE GRAPHIC IS TALLER - BUT NOT WIDER - THAN THE 
        	SCREEN...
        		Ie:-
        				+- (GRAPHIC) --+
                                        |              |
        			    +===+== (SCREEN) ==+===+
                                    |   |              |   |
                                    |   |              |   |
                                    |   |              |   |
                                    |   |              |   |
                                    |   |              |   |
        			    +===+==============+===+
                                        |              |
        				+--------------+
        
                        When this occurs, we first draw the graphic at 
                        the CENTRE of the screen.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 137 of 202

        		You can then use the screen movement and 
        		scrolling keys; to move the screen around the 
        		graphic, and the graphic around the screen.  
        		Ie:-
        
        			    +== (SCREEN) ==+=======+
                                    |              |       |
                                    |              |       |
                                    |              |       |
                                    |              |       |
                                    |              |       |
        			    +==============+=======+
                                    |              |   ||
                                    |              | ======>
                                    |              |   ||
        			    +- (GRAPHIC) --+   \/
        
        			       /\   +- (GRAPHIC) --+
                                       ||   |              |
                                    <====== |              |
                                       ||   |              |
        			    +=======+== (SCREEN) ==+
                                    |       |              |
                                    |       |              |
                                    |       |              |
                                    |       |              |
                                    |       |              |
        			    +=======+==============+
        
        ================================================================
                         Home -*- End -*- PgUp -*- PgDn
        ================================================================
        
        These keys move the CORNERS of the screen and graphic together, 
        as follows:-
        
                Home = TOP LEFT
                           If the graphic and the screen are the SAME 
                           SIZE;
                               Does nothing (but BEEP).
                           Otherwise;
                               Moves the TOP LEFT CORNER of the graphic, 
                               and the TOP LEFT CORNER of the graphic, 
                               together.
        
                 End = BOTTOM LEFT
                           If the graphic and the screen are the SAME 
                           SIZE;
                               Does nothing (but BEEP).
                           Otherwise;
                               Moves the BOTTOM LEFT CORNER of the 
                               graphic, and the BOTTOM LEFT CORNER of 
                               the graphic, together.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 138 of 202

                PgUp = TOP RIGHT
                           If the graphic and the screen are the SAME 
                           SIZE;
                               Does nothing (but BEEP).
                           Otherwise;
                               Moves the TOP RIGHT CORNER of the 
                               graphic, and the TOP RIGHT CORNER of the 
                               graphic, together.
        
                PgDn = BOTTOM RIGHT
                           If the graphic and the screen are the SAME 
                           SIZE;
                               Does nothing (but BEEP).
                           Otherwise;
                               Moves the BOTTOM RIGHT CORNER of the 
                               graphic, and the BOTTOM RIGHT CORNER of 
                               the graphic, together.
        
        For example:-
        
                +==============+----------------+==============+
                | After "Home" |                | After "PgUp" |
                +==============+                +==============+
                |                                              |
                +==============+                +==============+
                | After "End"  |                | After "PgDn" |
                +==============+----------------+==============+
        
        ================================================================
                   T=TOP -*- B=BOTTOM -*- R=RIGHT -*- L=LEFT
        ================================================================
        
        These keys move the screen or graphic, as follows:-
        
                T = TOP
                    If the graphic is TALLER than the screen;
                        Moves the screen to the TOP of the graphic.
                    If the graphic and the screen are the SAME height;
                        Does nothing (but BEEP).
                    If the graphic is LESS TALL than the screen;
                        Moves the graphic to the TOP of the screen.
        
                        +-------------------------+==============+-----+
                        |                         |   TO Here    |     |
                        |                         +==============+     |
                        |                                /\            |
                        |                                ||            |
                        |                         +==============+     |
                        |                         |  FROM here   |     |
                        |                         +==============+     |
                        +----------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 139 of 202

                B = BOTTOM
                    If the graphic is TALLER than the screen;
                        Moves the screen to the BOTTOM of the graphic.
                    If the graphic and the screen are the SAME height;
                        Does nothing (but BEEP).
                    If the graphic is LESS TALL than the screen;
                        Moves the graphic to the BOTTOM of the screen.
        
                        +----------------------------------------------+
                        |       +==============+                       |
                        |       |  FROM here   |                       |
                        |       +==============+                       |
                        |              ||                              |
                        |              \/                              |
                        |       +==============+                       |
                        |       |   TO Here    |                       |
                        +-------+==============+-----------------------+
        
                L = LEFT
                    If the graphic is WIDER than the screen;
                        Moves the screen to the LEFT of the graphic.
                    If the graphic and the screen are the SAME width;
                        Does nothing (but BEEP).
                    If the graphic is LESS WIDE than the screen;
                        Moves the graphic to the LEFT of the screen.
        
                        +----------------------------------------------+
                        +==============+           +==============+    |
                        |   TO Here    |  <<<----  |  FROM here   |    |
                        +==============+           +==============+    |
                        +----------------------------------------------+
        
                R = RIGHT
                    If the graphic is WIDER than the screen;
                        Moves the screen to the RIGHT of the graphic.
                    If the graphic and the screen are the SAME width;
                        Does nothing (but BEEP).
                    If the graphic is LESS WIDE than the screen;
                        Moves the graphic to the RIGHT of the screen.
        
                        +----------------------------------------------+
                        |    +==============+           +==============+
                        |    |  FROM here   |  ---->>>  |   TO Here    |
                        |    +==============+           +==============+
                        +----------------------------------------------+
        
        NOTES!
        ------
        
        1.  L and R move the screen/graphic (to the graphic/screen's 
            LEFT and RIGHT respectively), without changing the 
            screen/graphic's VERTICAL position (on the graphic/screen).

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 140 of 202

            Consider this example:-
                        +----------------------------------------------+
                        |       ^        (GRAPHIC)         ^           |
                        |       |                          |           |
                        | (100 pixels)               (100 pixels)      |
                        |       |                          |           |
                        | ------+-- (200 pixels) -->|      |           |
                        |       v                   |      v           |
                        +==============+            +==============+   |
                        |   (SCREEN)   |  <<<-----  |   (SCREEN)   |   |
                        |   TO Here    |  <<<-----  |  FROM here   |   |
                        +==============+            +==============+   |
                        +----------------------------------------------+
        
            In the above example, the screen is 200 pixels from the LEFT 
            of the graphic, and 100 pixels from the TOP.  Pressing L, 
            leaves the screen 0 pixels from the LEFT of the graphic, but 
            still 100 pixels from the TOP.
        
        2.  Similarly, T and B move the screen/graphic (to the 
            graphic/screen's TOP and BOTTOM respectively), without 
            changing the screen/graphic's HORIZONTAL position (on the 
            graphic/screen).
        
        ================================================================
           C=CENTRE -*- H=CENTRE HORIZONTALLY -*- V=CENTRE VERTICALLY
        ================================================================
        
        These key move the centres of the screen and graphic together, 
        as follows:-
        
        	C = CENTRE
        		Moves the centre of the screen, and the centre
        		of the graphic together - both HORIZONTALLY and
        		VERTICALLY.  For example:-
        
        		+------------------ (GRAPHIC) -----------------+
                        |  += (SCN) =+                                 |
                        |  |  FROM   |                                 |
                        |  |  here   |     += (SCN) =+                 |
                        |  +=========+     |   TO    |                 |
                        |       |          |  here   |                 |
                        |       |          +=========+                 |
                        |       |               ^                      |
                        |       +---------------+                      |
        		+----------------------------------------------+
        
        	H = CENTRE HORIZONTALLY
        		Moves the centre of the screen, and the centre 
        		of the graphic together - in the HORIZONTAL 
        		direction only.  For example:-

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 141 of 202

        		+------------------ (GRAPHIC) -----------------+
                        |  += (SCN) =+     += (SCN) =+                 |
                        |  |  FROM   |     |   TO    |                 |
                        |  |  here   |     |  here   |                 |
                        |  +=========+     +=========+                 |
                        |       |               ^                      |
                        |       |               |                      |
                        |       +---------------+                      |
                        |                                              |
        		+----------------------------------------------+
        
        	V = CENTRE VERTICALLY
        		Moves the centre of the screen, and the centre 
        		of the graphic together - in the VERTICALLY 
        		direction only.  For example:-
        
        		+------------------ (GRAPHIC) -----------------+
                        |  += (SCN) =+                                 |
                        |  |  FROM   | ---+                            |
                        |  |  here   |    |                            |
                        |  +=========+    |                            |
                        |  += (SCN) =+    |                            |
                        |  |   TO    | <--+                            |
                        |  |  here   |                                 |
                        |  +=========+                                 |
        		+----------------------------------------------+
        
        ================================================================
               UpArrow -*- DownArrow -*- LeftArrow -*- RightArrow
        ================================================================
        
        These keys SCROLL the screen around the graphic (or the graphic 
        around the screen), in one of two modes, as follows:-
        
                MICRO MODE (PIXEL BY PIXEL SCROLLING) OFF
                -----------------------------------------
        
                         UpArrow = Move UP    Normal speed      (5)
                   Shift+UpArrow = Move UP    Fast          (4) (5)
        
                       DownArrow = Move DOWN  Normal speed      (5)
                 Shift+DownArrow = Move DOWN  Fast          (4) (5)
        
                       LeftArrow = Move LEFT  Normal speed      (5)
                 Shift+LeftArrow = Move LEFT  Fast          (4) (5)
        
                      RightArrow = Move RIGHT Normal speed      (5)
                Shift+RightArrow = Move RIGHT Fast          (4) (5)
        
                NORMAL SPEED, is such that it takes max. FIVE key 
                presses (but see note 6), to move the screen (graphic) 
                from one side of the graphic (screen) to the other.  
                This allows you to move around quite quickly.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 142 of 202

                FAST, is such that you move one screen/graphic (height 
                or width), at a time.  This lets you move around even 
                faster, without missing any bits out.
        
                MICRO MODE (PIXEL BY PIXEL SCROLLING) ON
                ----------------------------------------
        
                         UpArrow  =  Move UP     1 pixel       (5)
                   Shift+UpArrow  =  Move UP    10 pixels  (4) (5)
        
                       DownArrow  =  Move DOWN   1 pixel       (5)
                 Shift+DownArrow  =  Move DOWN  10 pixels  (4) (5)
        
                       LeftArrow  =  Move LEFT   1 pixel       (5)
                 Shift+LeftArrow  =  Move LEFT  10 pixels  (4) (5)
        
                      RightArrow  =  Move RIGHT  1 pixel       (5)
                Shift+RightArrow  =  Move RIGHT 10 pixels  (4) (5)
        
                Micro Mode ON, lets you scroll around the graphic, with 
                more control.  You can put the screen exactly where you 
                want it; with pixel precision.
        
        NOTES!
        ------
        1.  The "SHIFT" key acts as an "ACCELERATOR" key.  Pressing it, 
            together with an Arrow key, speeds up the scrolling.
        
        2.  MICRO MODE (pixel by pixel scrolling) DEFAULTS OFF.
        
        3.  You TOGGLE Micro Mode (pixel by pixel scrolling), by
            pressing:-
        
                M = Toggle MICRO MODE (pixel by pixel scrolling) ON/OFF
        
        4.  The "Shift" key works on the NUMERIC KEYPAD only.  The 
            CURSOR DIAMOND ignores the "Shift" key.  So, 
            "(CursorDiamond)Shift+Arrow" does the same thing as 
            "(CursorDiamond)Arrow".  In other words, you get "normal 
            speed" scrolling from the Cursor Diamond arrow keys, whether 
            you press the "Shift" key or not.
        
        5.  The "Shift" key only speeds up the scrolling, if "NumLock" 
            is OFF.  If "NumLock" is ON, the speeds swap - so that 
            "Arrow" moves "fast", and; "Shirt+Arrow" moves at "normal 
            speed" - instead of the other way round.
        
        6.  With Micro Mode OFF, the Arrow keys (un-Shifted) move you 
            around the graphic - such that it takes max. FIVE key 
            presses to cross the graphic.  But, this only works for 
            standard sized graphics.  LARGE graphics MAY require more 
            key presses.  This is because there is a limit - of 1 screen 
            (width or height) - on the amount that a single key press 
            can move the screen.

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 143 of 202

            NOTE!  You will need at least a 1920 wide x 1200 high 
        	   graphic, displayed on a 320 wide x 200 high video 
        	   mode, before this occurs.
        
        ================================================================
                    CHANGING THE LEVEL (NESTING UP AND DOWN)
        ================================================================
        
        The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, is level 6.
        
                     Level 1  =  Drives
                     Level 2  =  Wanted Files
                     Level 3  =  Directorys
        	     Level 4  =  Files (Stats Only)
        	     Level 5  =  FILES (STATS & PICTURES)  (Esc)
        	-->  Level 6  =  Full Screen (Shorts)
        	     Level 7  =  FULL SCREEN (ORIGINALS)   (Enter)
        
        Esc nests you up, to the "FILES (STATS & PICTURES)" level.
        
        Enter nests you down, to the "FULL SCREEN (ORIGINALS)" level.
        
        ================================================================
                               CHANGING THE VIEW
        ================================================================
        
        GUF, version 1c, supports only 1 "View".
        
        So, the view changing keys:-
        
                Backspace  =  Go to the PREVIOUS view
        and;    Tab        =  Go to the NEXT     view,
        
        DON'T WORK.
        
        ================================================================
                                  QUITTING GUF
        ================================================================
        
        To quit GUF, from the "Full Screen (Shorts)" level:-
        
                        -  Press /  -  to invoke the Main Menu
        
        and then;       -  Press Q  -  to Quit.
        
        Once you have done this, you will be returned to the program 
        from which you called GUF (usually either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
        or; Windows).

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 144 of 202

        ================================================================
                                THE "MAIN MENU"
        ================================================================
        
        The "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, has the following "Main 
        Menu":-
        
               +-----------------------------------------------+
               |  +=========================================+  |
               |  |                MAIN MENU                |  |
               |  +=========================================+  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |     H=Header Box     |   A=All Boxes    |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |  SK=Scroll Keys Box  |  DB=Default Box  |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |    FI=Files Box      |    N=No Boxes    |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |  V=Video Modes Box   |        -         |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |          -           |        -         |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |    FO=Fonts Box      |        -         |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |    ST=Stats Box      |  U=User Manual   |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |          -           |        -         |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |  |     K=Keys Box       |      Q=Quit      |  |
               |  +----------------------+------------------+  |
               |            +======================+           |
               |            |  Esc=CancelMainMenu  |           |
               |            +======================+           |
               +-----------------------------------------------+
        
        To activate this "Main Menu", press /.
        
        To CANCEL the "Main Menu" (and return to the "Full Screen 
        (Shorts)" level's main screen), press Esc.
        
        The OPTIONS available are:-
        
                 H = (Toggle) HEADER Box
                        Enables and disables the "Header" box
        
                SK = (Toggle) SCROLL KEYS Box
                        Enables and disables the "Scroll Keys" box
        
                FI = (Toggle) FILES Box
                        Enables and disables the "Files" box
        
                 V = (Toggle) VIDEO MODES Box
                        Enables and disables the "Video Modes" box

        Chapter 15: The "Full Screen (Shorts)" Level --- Page 145 of 202

                FO = (Toggle) FONTS Box
                        Enables and disables the "Fonts" box
        
                ST = (Toggle) STATS Box
                        Enables and disables the "Stats" box
        
                 K = (Toggle) KEYS Box
                        Enables and disables the "Keys" box
        
                 A = Show ALL Boxes
                        Enables ALL the "pop-up" boxes.
        
                DB = Show DEFAULT Boxes
                        Enables the "Header", "Files" and "Keys" boxes. 
                        Disables the rest.
        
                 N = Show NO Boxes
                        Disables ALL the "pop-up" boxes.
        
        NOTE!  An enabled (pop-up) box, is displayed on the screen (over 
               the graphic).  A disabled (pop-up) box is NOT (displayed 
               on the screen).  See above, for more details on these 
               boxes.
        
                 U = USER MANUAL
                        Displays, and allows you to read (on-screen), 
                        the on-line "User Manual".
        
                        NOTE!  This option is NOT YET IMPLEMENTED.
        
                 Q = QUIT
                        Quits GUF (without any further confirmation), 
                        and returns you to the program from which you 
                        called GUF (usually, either; the MS-DOS prompt, 
                        or; Windows).

        Chapter 16: "Full Screen (Originals)" Level ---- Page 146 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 16                         ##
        ##            THE "FULL SCREEN (ORIGINALS)" LEVEL             ##
        ################################################################
        
        The "Full Screen (Originals)" level, is the same as the "Full 
        Screen (Shorts)" level - except that it displays the SOURCE FILE 
        (or LONG) only.  (The SHORT, if there is one, is ignored.)
        
        See the Chapter that describes the "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, 
        for more details.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 147 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 17                         ##
        ##          CREATING, SELECTING & DELETING "SHORTS"           ##
        ################################################################
        
        Shorts are created, selected and deleted, from the "Shorts" box.
        
        The "Shorts" box is entered from either;
        
                the "FILES (STATS ONLY)"      level "Main Menu",
        
        or;     the "FILES (STATS & PICTURES" level "Main Menu".
        
        Press /SH, from either of the above two levels, to enter the 
        "Shorts" box.
        
        ================================================================
                          THE "SHORTS" BOX MAIN SCREEN
        ================================================================
        
        A typical "Shorts" box screen, looks like:-
        
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                 +--------------------------+                 |
        |       +---------+  View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk  +--------+        |
        |       |  GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer  |        |
        |       +---+  Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)  +---+        |
        |           +-------------------------------------+            |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |                         SHORTS                         |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  C:\GRAPHICS\                              Fit APPROX  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |  |  1   PUMPKIN.GIF    (No SCN) (No WDW)  320w 200h 256c  |  |
        |  |                                                        |  |
        |  |  2   BARTCLR.GIF    (SCN) (WDW)        640w 350h  16c  |  |
        |  |  3   GIF00001.KRT   VGAxxxxxxx (WDW)   534w 292h  16c  |  |
        |  |                                                        |  |
        |  |  4   NZ.GIF         (SCN) (WDW)        640w 436h   8c  |  |
        |  |  5   GIF00002.KRT   VGAxxxxxxx (SCN)   640w 436h  32c  |  |
        |  |  6   GIF00003.KRT   VGAxxxxxxx (WDW)   429w 292h  32c  |  |
        |  +--------------------------------------------------------+  |
        |                                                              |
        +-----------------+-------------+-----------------+------------+
        |   Page 1 of 9   |  F1=-Report |    F4=*Data     |  F7=*B&W   |
        |  [<>]=TurnPage  |  F2=+Report |  F5=*Graphic    |  F8=*Tick  |
        |    Esc=Quit     |   F3=*Fit   | F6=*MenuPalette |  F9=Menu   |
        +-----------------+-------------+-----------------+------------+

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 148 of 202

        The "Shorts" box lists all the "source files" that are currently 
        loaded, and, underneath each source file, the "shorts" (if any,) 
        that the source file owns.
        
        In the screen dump above, for example:-
        
                -  PUMPKIN.GIF is the first source file; and it owns NO 
                   shorts.
        
                -  BARTCLR.GIF is the second source file; and it owns 1 
                   short; GIF00001.KRT.
        
                -  NZ.GIF is the third source file; and it owns 2 
                   shorts; GIF00002.KRT and GIF00003.KRT.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        The "VGAxxx" strings (in the screen dump above), represent the 
        data that describes the screen or window for which the short was 
        created.  However, this data is too long to show in full, on the 
        screen dump.  It is described in more detail, below.
        
        ================================================================
                             THE "SHORTS" BOX KEYS
        ================================================================
        
        The keys used to operate the "Shorts" box are ALL listed 
        on-screen.  (See the screen dump above.)
        
        The keys are:-
        
                1-Z = SELECT SOURCE FILE/SHORT
                        (See below)
        
                F1  = PREVIOUS REPORT
                F2  = NEXT     REPORT
                        Not yet implemented
        
                F3  = ROTATE FIT
                        (See below)
        
                F4  = SWAP DATA
                        The "Shorts" box displays TWO blocks of data for 
                        each source file or short:-
                                -  the VIDEO MODE/PLATFORM
                                -  the graphic WIDTH/HEIGHT/COLOURS
        
                        This data is all shown on one line; immediately
                        following the source file or short's 
                        FILENAME.EXT (see the screen dump above).
        
                        By DEFAULT, the video mode/platform data is 
                        shown first, followed by the 
                        width/height/colours data.  Pressing F4, toggles 
                        this order.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 149 of 202

                F5  = TOGGLE GRAPHICS MODE
                        Toggles graphics mode ON and OFF.
        
                        By DEFAULT graphics mode is OFF.  In this case, 
                        one line of (text) data is listed per source 
                        file, and as many source files as possible are 
                        listed per page.  (See the screen dump above.)
        
                        When graphics mode is ON, one line of (text) 
                        data is listed per source file (the same as when 
                        graphics mode is OFF), but only ONE source file 
                        is listed per page.  This makes it possible to 
                        display the source file's graphic, in a window, 
                        immediately the source file's (text) data.
        
                F6  = TOGGLE MENU PALETTE
                        Toggles menu palette presevation OFF and ON.  
                        (Works in GRAPHICS mode only.)
        
                        When menu palette preservation is ON (which is 
                        the DEFAULT), the "menus" (ie; the stuff on 
                        screen, OTHER than the graphic), are displayed 
                        in their correct colours,  Thus, they are easy 
                        to read.
        
                        When menu palette preservation is OFF, all the 
                        colour slots supported by the video mode, are 
                        made available to the graphic.  Thus, the 
                        graphic (usually) looks better, but the "menu" 
                        colours change (randomly, to those used by the 
                        graphic).  The menus MAY become difficult, if 
                        not impossible, to read.
        
                F7  = TOGGLE BLACK AND WHITE
                        Toggles the display of the graphic in black and 
                        white ON and OFF.  (Works in GRAPHICS mode 
                        only.)
        
                        By DEFAULT, the graphics are displayed in 
                        colour.  But if black and white is ON, then the 
                        graphics will be displayed in gray-scale.  This 
                        often improves their clarity and detail.
        
                F8  = TOGGLE TICK
                        Toggles the "tick" status, of the the currently 
                        displayed source file.  (Works in GRAPHICS mode 
                        only.)
        
                F9  = MAIN MENU
                        (See below)

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 150 of 202

        ================================================================
                                F3 = ROTATE FIT
        ================================================================
        
        A short is a scaled version of a source file, that fits, more or 
        less exactly, the screen or window in which it is to be 
        displayed.
        
        When listing and creating shorts, GUF needs to decide which 
        source files need shorts.
        
        Obviously, if the source file is way too big for the screen or 
        window, then a short will be useful.  But there is little point 
        in creating a short for a source file that exactly fits (the 
        screen or window in which it is to be displayed).
        
        A 640x350 16 colour source file, for example (like BARTCLR.GIF, 
        see above), can be displayed, full screen, in EGA 640x350 16 
        colour mode.  Creating a full-screen short for it would, 
        therefore, be a waste of time (and disk space).
        
        But what about a 640x436 8 colour source file (like NZ.GIF, see 
        above).  This could be displayed in VGA 640x480 16 colour mode. 
        In this mode, it would fit the screen width exactly, and just be 
        a little short (9%) as regards height.
        
        We could scale the graphic up to 640x480 pixels, but is it worth 
        it?  The small height increase is NOT going to make the graphic 
        much easier to see.
        
        For these reasons, when deciding whether or not a source file
        needs a short, you can select any of three different criteria
        for GUF to use:-
        
                FIT = APPROX
                        With Fit = APPROX, GUF will decide that the 
                        source file needs a short if EITHER:-
        
                                a)  The source file is more than 20% 
                                    LARGER than the screen or window in 
                                    which it is to be displayed,
        
                        AND/OR; b)  The source file is more than 50% 
                                    SMALLER than the screen or window in 
                                    which it is to be displayed.
        
                WITHIN
                        With Fit = WITHIN, GUF will decide that the
                        source file needs a short if EITHER:-
        
                                a)  The source file is WIDER than the
                                    screen or window in which it is to 
                                    be displayed,

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 151 of 202

                        OR;     b)  The source file is HIGHER than the 
                                    screen or window in which it is to 
                                    be displayed.
        
                EXACTLY
                        With Fit = EXACTLY, GUF will decide that the 
                        source file needs a short UNLESS the source file 
                        is exactly the SAME WIDTH and HEIGHT, as the 
                        screen or window in which it is to be displayed.
        
        Fit = APPROX is the DEFAULT.
        
        But you can select any of the other "Fit" criteria, by using the 
        F3 key to work through them, as follows:-
        
                         +---<---+
                         |       |
                Fit = APPROX     |
                Fit = WITHIN    F3
                Fit = EXACTLY    |
                         |       |
                         +--->---+
        
        ================================================================
                          THE SHORT STATUS INDICATORS
        ================================================================
        
        When listing the source files and their shorts, GUF uses the 
        following text strings, to indicate the status of the source 
        file/short:-
        
        SOURCE FILES
        ------------
        
                "(SCN)"    (Green)
                "(WDW)"    (Green)
                        The source file is it's own FULL SCREEN/WINDOW 
                        short.  (Therefore, the source file does NOT 
                        need a FULL SCREEN/WINDOW short; nor does it 
                        have one.)
        
                "(SCNv)"   (Green)
                "(WDWv)"   (Green)
                        The source file NEEDS a (selected) FULL 
                        SCREEN/WINDOW short; and it HAS one.  Moreover, 
                        that (selected) FULL SCREEN/WINDOW short, meets 
                        the currently selected "Fit" criteria.
        
                "(SCNv?)"  (Yellow)
                "(WDWv?)"  (Yellow)
                        The source file NEEDS a (selected) FULL 
                        SCREEN/WINDOW short; and it HAS one.  However, 
                        that (selected) FULL SCREEN/WINDOW short, does 
                        NOT meet the currently selected "Fit" criteria.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 152 of 202

                "(No SCN)" (Red)
                "(No WDW)" (Red)
                        The source file needs a (selected) FULL 
                        SCREEN/WINDOW short, but it does NOT have one.  
                        In other words, EITHER; the required short has 
                        NOT yet been CREATED, OR; the required short HAS 
                        been created, but it has NOT yet been 
                        "SELECTED".
        
        SHORTS
        ------
        
                "(SCN)"  (Green)
                        The short is the (selected) FULL SCREEN short, 
                        and there is at least one video mode, on which 
                        it can be displayed, full-screen, to meet the 
                        (currently selected) "Fit" criteria.
        
                "(SCN?)" (Yellow)
                        The short is the (selected) FULL SCREEN short, 
                        but there is NO video mode, on which it can be 
                        displayed, full-screen, to meet the (currently 
                        selected) "Fit" criteria.
        
                "(WDW)"  (Green)
                        The short is the (selected) WINDOW short, and it 
                        meets the (currently selected) "Fit" criteria, 
                        for the window in which it is to be displayed.
        
                "(WDW?)" (Yellow)
                        The short is the (selected) WINDOW short, but it 
                        does NOT meet the (currently selected) "Fit" 
                        criteria, for the window in which it is to be 
                        displayed.
        
                "(S/W)"  (Green)
                        The short is the (selected) FULL SCREEN short, 
                        and there is at least one video mode, on which 
                        it can be displayed, full-screen, to meet the 
                        (currently selected) "Fit" criteria.  The short 
                        is ALSO the (selected) WINDOW short, and it 
                        meets the (currently selected) "Fit" criteria, 
                        for the window in which it is to be displayed.
        
                "(S?/W)"  (Yellow)
                        The short is the (selected) FULL SCREEN short, 
                        but there is NO video mode, on which it can be 
                        displayed, full-screen, to meet the (currently 
                        selected) "Fit" criteria.  The short is ALSO the 
                        (selected) WINDOW short, and it meets the 
                        (currently selected) "Fit" criteria, for the 
                        window in which it is to be displayed.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 153 of 202

                "(S/W?)"  (Yellow)
                        The short is the (selected) FULL SCREEN short, 
                        and there is at least one video mode, on which 
                        it can be displayed, full-screen, to meet the 
                        (currently selected) "Fit" criteria.  The short 
                        is ALSO the (selected) WINDOW short, but it does 
                        NOT meet the (currently selected) "Fit" 
                        criteria, for the window in which it is to be 
                        displayed.
        
                "(S?/W?)" (Yellow)
                        The short is the (selected) FULL SCREEN short, 
                        but there is NO video mode, on which it can be 
                        displayed, full-screen, to meet the (currently 
                        selected) "Fit" criteria.  The short is ALSO the 
                        (selected) WINDOW short, but it does NOT meet 
                        the (currently selected) "Fit" criteria, for the 
                        window in which it is to be displayed.
        
        ================================================================
                     ANALYSING THE SHORT STATUS INDICATORS
        ================================================================
        
        The short status indicators (described above), tell you which 
        source files need shorts, and which do not.
        
        For example:-
        
            BARTCLR.GIF    (SCN) (No WDW)                    640w 350h  16c
        
            NZ.GIF         (No SCN) (No WDW)                 640w 480h 256c
        
        In this example, BARTCLR.GIF is it's own FULL-SCREEN short.  
        However, it needs a WINDOW short.  NZ.GIF needs both FULL-SCREEN 
        and WINDOW shorts.
        
        If you viewed this example on-screen, the "(SCN)" text would be 
        Green, and the "(No SCN)" texts would be Red.  The Red, is to 
        draw your attention to the shorts that need to be created and/or 
        selected.
        
        Here are the same two source files, after we've CREATED, but NOT 
        selected, the required shorts for them.
        
            BARTCLR.GIF    (SCN) (No WDW)                    640w 350h  16c
            GIF00001.KRT   VGA 34x80 640x480  16c 1h         534w 292h  16c
        
            NZ.GIF         (No SCN) (No WDW)                 640w 436h 256c
            GIF00002.KRT   VGA       320x200 256c            320w 200h 256c
            GIF00003.KRT   VGA 34x80 640x480  16c 1h         429w 292h  32c
        
        Note that the "(No SCN)" texts, still remain.  Although we've 
        created the required shorts, we have NOT yet selected them.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 154 of 202

        Here are the same two source files, after we've both CREATED and 
        SELECTED the required shorts for them.
        
            BARTCLR.GIF    (SCN) (WDWv)                      640w 350h  16c
            GIF00001.KRT   VGA 34x80 640x480  16c 1h (WDW)   534w 292h  16c
        
            NZ.GIF         (SCNv) (WDWv)                     640w 436h 256c
            GIF00002.KRT   VGA       320x200 256c (SCN)      320w 200h 256c
            GIF00003.KRT   VGA 34x80 640x480  16c (WDW)      429w 292h  32c
        
        Here, the "(No SCN)"/"(No WDW)" messages (in Red) have changed 
        to "(SCNv)"/"(WDWv)" (in Green).  Thus, as regards Shorts, both 
        files are now OK.
        
        In essense then, when looking at the list of source files and 
        shorts, you can easily identify those source files for which 
        shorts are required, because they will be marked with "(No 
        SCN)"/"(No WDW)" messages, in RED.
        
        By contrast, source files that either; do NOT require shorts, 
        or; already have the required shorts, will be marked with 
        "(SCN)"/"(WDW)" or "(SCNv)"/"(WDWv)" messages, in GREEN.
        
        And source files that have shorts - but whoose shorts DON'T meet 
        the currently selected "Fit" criteria - are marked in YELLOW.  
        You'll have to think about these ones.  Maybe they're OK; maybe 
        they're not.
        
        ================================================================
                           "ACTIONING" A SOURCE FILE
        ================================================================
        
        Pressing the number/letter key (1-Z), shown to the left of a 
        source file's FILENAME.EXT, will cause the following box to 
        pop-up:-
        
         +------------------------------------------------------------+
         |                        BARTCLR.GIF                         |
         |       What do you want to do with this SOURCE FILE?        |
         | +----------------+ +---------------------+ +-------------+ |
         | | T=(Toggle)Tick | | E=EditCreateOptions | | &=Tick&Edit | |
         | +----------------+ +---------------------+ +-------------+ |
         |   +----------------+ +----------------+ +--------------+   |
         |   | C=CreateShorts | | D=DeleteShorts | | V=ViewShorts |   |
         |   +----------------+ +----------------+ +--------------+   |
         |                        +----------+                        |
         |                        | Esc=Quit |                        |
         |                        +----------+                        |
         +------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        The options available are:-
        
                T = TOGGLE TICK
                        Toggles the file's "tick" status.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 155 of 202

                        If the file is currently ticked, it will become 
                        un-ticked; if the file is currently un-ticked, 
                        it will become ticked.
        
                        NOTE!
                        -----
                        "Ticked" files are used by the Main Menu's 
                        "Create" option.  This option, creates shorts 
                        for all the "ticked" files.
        
                E = EDIT CREATE OPTIONS
                        Allows you to edit the source file specific 
                        options, used when creating shorts.  See below, 
                        for more details.
        
                & = TICK & EDIT
                        Sets the source file's "tick" status ON, and 
                        then allows you to edit the source file specific 
                        options, used when creating shorts.
        
                C = CREATE SHORTS
                        Allows you to create shorts, for the source 
                        file.  See below, for more details.
        
                D = DELETE SHORTS
                        Allows you to delete either; ALL the shorts 
                        owned by the source file, or; all the shorts 
                        owned by the source file, except the selected 
                        shorts.  See below, for more details.
        
                        NOTE!
                        -----
                        To delete a SINGLE short, see the section 
                        entitled "ACTIONING A SHORT", below.
        
                V = VIEW SHORTS
                        Allows you to view (full-screen), the shorts 
                        owned by the source file.
        
                        (Actually, this option allows you to view the 
                        shorts owned by ALL the source files.  However, 
                        you will start off viewing the shorts for the 
                        selected source file.)
        
        ================================================================
                EDITING THE SOURCE FILE SPECIFIC CREATE OPTIONS
        ================================================================
        
        GUF creates shorts, by calling the Image Alchemy graphic file 
        manipulation program, to create a scaled (up or down) version of 
        the original source file.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 156 of 202

        Image Alchemy supports a number of options, that allow you to 
        control the scaling process.  GUF supports the majority of these 
        (the dithering options, which are just too complicated and 
        obscure, are about the only ones left out).
        
        You edit these Alchemy options, whenever you select any of the 
        following menu options, from the "ACTION SOURCE FILE" box (see 
        above):-
        
                E = EDIT CREATE OPTIONS
                & = TICK & EDIT
                C = CREATE SHORTS.
        
        Selecting any of those menu options, will result in the 
        following TWO boxes popping-up.
        
        First, the "Which (Alchemy) SCALING METHOD Should We Use?" box:-
        
                   +----------------------------------------+
                   |           Create shorts for            |
                   |              BARTCLR.GIF               |
                   +----------------------------------------+
                   |                                        |
                   |    Which (Alchemy) SCALING METHOD,     |
                   |  should we use, for THIS source file?  |
                   |    (You must select at least one!)     |
                   |                                        |
                   | +------------------------------------+ |
                   | | N * NEAREST NEIGHBOUR              | |
                   | |       For text/line/box type       | |
                   | |       graphics (DTP)               | |
                   | +------------------------------------+ |
                   | | 3 * LANCZOS 3                      | |
                   | |       For photographs/fine art;    | |
                   | |       best quality; but slowest    | |
                   | +------------------------------------+ |
                   | | 2   LANCZOS 2                      | |
                   | |       For photographs/fine art;    | |
                   | |       medium speed/quality         | |
                   | +------------------------------------+ |
                   | | A   AVERAGING/LINEAR INTERPOLATION | |
                   | |       For photographs/fine art;    | |
                   | |       fastest; but lowest quality  | |
                   | +------------------------------------+ |
                   | Enter=Continue                Esc=Quit |
                   +----------------------------------------+
        
        This box allows you to select which of the Alchemy scaling 
        methods we should use.
        
        By DEFAULT, GUF creates TWO shorts for each source file; the 
        first, created with Alchemy's "Nearest Neighbour" scaling 
        method; the second, created with Alchemy's "Lanczos 3" scaling 
        method.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 157 of 202

        However, you can select any combination of these scaling 
        methods, and a separate short will be created for each one.
        
        This allows you to then use the "VIEW SHORTS" option, to check 
        out which scaling method gives the best results.  You can then 
        delete all but the best.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        The scaling method selected (usually) has a significant effect 
        on the image quality of the created short.  So, you do need to 
        make the right choice.
        
        Although Image Alchemy theoretically supports FOUR "scaling 
        methods", in practice, there are really only TWO.
        
        The "Nearest Neighbour" scaling method is the first of these, 
        and it seems to work best for line/box/text type (computer 
        generated) graphic art.
        
        The remaining scaling methods - "Lanczos 3", "Lanczos 2" and 
        "Averaging/Linear Interpolation" - appear to be speed/quality 
        trade-off variants, of the same basic method:-
        
                              Lanczos 3 = Best   Quality / Slowest Speed
                              Lanczos 2 = Medium Quality / Medium  Speed
         Averaging/Linear Interpolation = Lowest Quality / Fastest Speed
        
        These scaling methods seem to work best with photographs and 
        fine art; in other words, with finely detailed images.
        
        Once you've selected the SCALING METHOD(s) that you require, 
        press Enter, and the "Which FILE Specific (Alchemy) OPTIONS Do 
        You Want For THIS Source File?" box will pop-up:-

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 158 of 202

                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |          Create shorts for           |
                    |             BARTCLR.GIF              |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |                                      |
                    |         Which FILE specific          |
                    |   (Alchemy) OPTIONS, do you want,    |
                    |        for THIS source file?         |
                    |                                      |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | | P  PRESERVE WIDTH/HEIGHT RATIO?  | |
                    | |    Yes No Both     (Default=Yes) | |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | | G  CONVERT TO GRAY SCALE?        | |
                    | |    Yes No Both      (Default=No) | |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | | S  SPIFF (INCREASE CONTRAST)?    | |
                    | |    Yes No Both      (Default=No) | |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | | E  EGA PALETTE?                  | |
                    | |    Yes No Both      (Default=No) | |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | | U  UNIFORM PALETTE?              | |
                    | |    Yes No Both      (Default=No) | |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | Enter=Continue              Esc=Quit |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        The "CONVERT TO GRAY SCALE?", "SPIFF?", "EGA PALETTE?" and 
        "UNIFORM PALETTE?" options, are probably not of much use when 
        creating shorts.  But, you can experiment with them, if you want 
        to.  See the Image Alchemy User Manual, for more details on what 
        these options do.
        
        The "PRESERVE WIDTH/HEIGHT RATIO?" option is useful, however.
        
        By DEFAULT, this option is set to ON ("Yes").
        
        This means that the scaled graphic will have the same 
        width/height ratio, as the source file.  More specifically, the 
        scaled graphic will have either the same width, or the same 
        height, as the screen or window in which it is to be displayed.  
        But, the other dimension (and thus the graphic as a whole,) will 
        be smaller.
        
        If "PRESERVE WIDTH/HEIGHT RATIO?" is set OFF ("No"), then the 
        scaled graphic will be sized so as to fit the screen or window 
        in which it is to be displayed, EXACTLY.
        
        You may have to experiment, to see which setting gives the best 
        results.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 159 of 202

        ================================================================
                    CREATING SHORTS FOR A SINGLE SOURCE FILE
        ================================================================
        
        To create shorts for a single source file:-
        
                a)  Select the source file that you wish to create 
                    shorts for - by pressing the number/letter key (1-Z) 
                    shown to the left of it's FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;   b)  Select the "C=CreateShorts" option, from the "What 
                    Do You Want To Do With This SOURCE FILE?" menu that 
                    pops-up.
        
        If you do this, then the:-
        
                a)  "Which (Alchemy) SCALING METHOD Should We Use?"
        
        and;    b)  "Which FILE Specific (Alchemy) OPTIONS Do You Want 
                    For THIS Source File?"
        
        boxes will pop-up (as described above).
        
        Then, the following SEVEN boxes will pop-up.
        
        First, the "What Type Of Shorts Do You Want To Create?" box:-
        
        	  +------------------------------------------+
        	  |	       Create shorts for	     |
        	  |		  BARTCLR.GIF		     |
        	  +------------------------------------------+
        	  |					     |
        	  |	     What type(s) of shorts	     |
        	  |	     do you want to create?	     |
        	  |	(You must select at least one!)      |
        	  |					     |
        	  | +--------------------------------------+ |
        	  | | F * FULL SCREEN			   | |
        	  | |	  For display on the		   | |
        	  | |	  "Full Screen (Shorts)" level     | |
        	  | +--------------------------------------+ |
        	  | | W * WINDOW			   | |
        	  | |	  For display on the		   | |
        	  | |	  "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level | |
        	  | +--------------------------------------+ |
                  | Enter=Continue                  Esc=Quit |
        	  +------------------------------------------+
        
        You can request that either or both of the Full Screen or Window 
        shorts be created.  However, you must request a least one of 
        these; as otherwise, there will be nothing to do.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 160 of 202

        Once you've specified the short type(s) that you want, press 
        Enter, and the "Which Of The Following VIDEO MODES May Be Used, 
        For The FULL-SCREEN Shorts" box will pop-up:-
        
                       +--------------------------------+
                       |       Create shorts for        |
                       |          BARTCLR.GIF           |
                       +--------------------------------+
                       |                                |
                       |     Which of the following     |
                       |    VIDEO MODES may be used,    |
                       |  for the FULL-SCREEN shorts?   |
                       | (You must select at least one. |
                       |        Default is ALL.)        |
        	       |				|
        	       | +----------------------------+ |
        	       | | 1 * EGA 320x200 16colours  | |
        	       | | 2 * EGA 640x200 16colours  | |
        	       | | 3 * EGA 640x350 16colours  | |
        	       | |			      | |
        	       | | 4 * VGA 640x480 16colours  | |
        	       | | 5 * VGA 320x200 256colours | |
        	       | +----------------------------+ |
                       | Enter=Continue        Esc=Quit |
        	       +--------------------------------+
        
        The video modes it lists, are those supported by the "Full 
        Screen (Shorts)" level.  When creating each short, GUF will 
        choose one of those video modes, using the video mode selection 
        strategy chosen from the "How Do We Choose - From The Permitted 
        Video Modes - The Video Mode For The FULL-SCREEN Shorts?" box 
        (see below), and create the short for that video mode.
        
        By DEFAULT, ALL the (five) video modes supported by the "Full 
        Screen (Shorts)" level are enabled.  But, if you want to disable 
        some video modes, or choose one specific video mode yourself, 
        you can do so now.
        
        Once you selected the video modes that you want GUF to choose 
        from, press Enter, and the "How Do We Choose - From The 
        Permitted Video Modes - The Video Mode For the FULL-SCREEN 
        Shorts?" box will pop-up:-

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 161 of 202

                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |            Create shorts for             |
                  |               BARTCLR.GIF                |
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |                                          |
                  |       How do we choose - from the        |
                  |    permitted video modes - the video     |
                  |     mode for the FULL-SCREEN shorts?     |
                  |     (You must select at least one.)      |
                  |                                          |
                  | +--------------------------------------+ |
                  | | A   ALL                              | |
                  | |       All (permitted) video modes    | |
                  | +--------------------------------------+ |
                  | | C * CLOSEST (default)                | |
                  | |       The mode whoose Width & Height | |
                  | |       are closest to the graphic     | |
                  | +--------------------------------------+ |
                  | | S   SMALLEST                         | |
                  | |       The lowest resolution          | |
                  | |       (smallest Width x Height) mode | |
                  | +--------------------------------------+ |
                  | | L   LARGEST                          | |
                  | |       The highest resolution         | |
                  | |       (largest Width x Height) mode  | |
                  | +--------------------------------------+ |
                  | Enter=Continue                  Esc=Quit |
                  +------------------------------------------+
        
        By DEFAULT, we choose one video mode for each FULL-SCREEN short; 
        the video mode CLOSEST in size to the source file.
        
        However, you can choose the video mode for which the FULL-SCREEN 
        shorts are to be created in other ways, as listed in the box 
        above.
        
        Also, you can choose any combination of the CLOSEST, SMALLEST 
        and LARGEST full-screen video mode selection strategys.  If you 
        do so, a separate short will be created for each selected 
        strategy.
        
        However, if you choose the ALL selection strategy, the other 
        selection strategys will be disabled.  Instead, a separate short 
        will be created for each of the "permitted" video modes.  (Where 
        the "permitted" video modes, are those selected from the "Which 
        Of The Following VIDEO MODES May Be Used, For The FULL-SCREEN 
        Shorts" box; see above.)
        
        Once you've selected the full screen short video mode selection 
        strategy(s) that you require, press Enter, and the "Which Of The 
        Following PLATFORMS Do You Want To Create WINDOW Shorts For?" 
        box will pop-up:-

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 162 of 202

        +------------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                        Create shorts for                         |
        |                           BARTCLR.GIF                            |
        +------------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                                  |
        |                 Which of the following PLATFORMS                 |
        |             do you want to create WINDOW shorts for?             |
        |                 (You must select at least one.)                  |
        | (DEFAULT (Green background), is the currently selected platform) |
        |                                                                  |
        | +--------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | 1   28x80  TEXT     CGA 80x25 16colours ColourON   BIOS 8x14 | |
        | | 2   30x80  GRAPHIC  VGA 640x480 16colours          BIOS 8x16 | |
        | | 3 * 34x80  GRAPHIC  VGA 640x480 16colours          BIOS 8x14 | |
        | | 4   43x80  GRAPHIC  EGA 640x350 16colours          BIOS 8x8  | |
        | | 5   50x40  TEXT     CGA 40x25 16colours ColourOFF  BIOS 8x8  | |
        | | 6   50x40  TEXT     CGA 40x25 16colours ColourON   BIOS 8x8  | |
        | | 7   50x80  TEXT     MDA 80x25 Monochrome           BIOS 8x8  | |
        | | 8   50x80  TEXT     CGA 80x25 16colours ColourOFF  BIOS 8x8  | |
        | | 9   50x80  TEXT     CGA 80x25 16colours ColourOFF  BIOS 8x8  | |
        | | A   60x80  GRAPHIC  VGA 640x480 16colours          BIOS 8x8  | |
        | +----------------------------+------------------+--------------+ |
        | |        Page 3 of 3         |  <=PreviousPage  |  >=NextPage  | |
        | +----------------------------+------------------+--------------+ |
        |  Enter=Continue                                        Esc=Quit  |
        +------------------------------------------------------------------+
        
        The platform DEFAULTS to the currently selected "Files (Stats & 
        Pictures)" level platform.  (Which, in turn, defaults to the VGA 
        640x480 16 colour video mode, with the BIOS 8x14 font.)
        
        However, if you want to create WINDOW shorts for another 
        platform, you can.
        
        Once you've selected the platform that you want to create WINDOW 
        shorts for, press Enter, and the "Which GLOBAL (Alchemy) OPTIONS 
        Do You Want?" box will pop-up:-
        
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |          Create shorts for           |
                    |             BARTCLR.GIF              |
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |                                      |
                    |             Which GLOBAL             |
                    |   (Alchemy) OPTIONS, do you want?    |
                    |                                      |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | | R  RESERVE FIRST 16 COLOURS?     | |
                    | |    (For menus)                   | |
                    | |    (256 colour modes only)       | |
                    | |    Yes No Both     (Default=Yes) | |
                    | +----------------------------------+ |
                    | Enter=Continue              Esc=Quit |
                    +--------------------------------------+

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 163 of 202

        Alchemy allows you to reserve the first 16 colours of any 
        graphics it creates.  If you do this, Alchemy fills these first 
        16 colour slots, with the colours from the IBM PC standard 16 
        colour palette.  This ensures that, when the graphic is 
        displayed, any "menus" that appear over or around it, appear in 
        their correct colours.
        
        However there is little point in doing this in 16 colour video 
        modes, since there would be no free colour slots left for the 
        graphic.
        
        But in 256 colour video modes, you can create 256 colour 
        graphics; with the first 16 colour slots reserved for the menus, 
        and the remaining 240 colour slots available for the graphic.  
        
        Reducing the number of colour slots for the graphic, from 256 to 
        240, (usually) doesn't affect the image quality very much.  So, 
        reserving the first 16 colour slots for the menus creates the 
        situation, where you can view both the graphic, and the menus, 
        in their correct colours.
        
        By DEFAULT, "RESERVE FIRST 16 COLOURS?" is ON.  But you can 
        switch it OFF, if you want.
        
        Once you've edited the global Alchemy options, press Enter, and 
        the "Get Alchemy & RedSwap Directorys" box will pop-up:-
        
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |            Create shorts for             |
                  |               BARTCLR.GIF                |
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |                                          |
                  |  ALCHEMY...                              |
                  |    -  Filename.Ext:  ALCHEMY.EXE         |
                  |    A  ...Directory:  (C:\)               |
                  |                                          |
                  |  FREE (MS-DOS Conventional) MEMORY...    |
                  |    500,000 bytes in 3 blocks             |
                  |    (largest free block = 490,000 bytes)  |
                  |                                          |
                  |  REDSWAP...                              |
                  |    -  Filename.Ext:  REDSWAPM.EXE        |
                  |    R  ...Directory:  (C:\)               |
                  |    U  ....USE? (*):  No                  |
                  |                                          |
                  |  (*) Use RedSwap, if Alchemy fails,      |
                  |      due to lack of memory.              |
                  |                                          |
                  |  Enter=Continue                Esc=Quit  |
                  +------------------------------------------+
        
        This box lets you:-
        
                a)  Search for the directory in which the Image Alchemy 
                    and RedSwap program files (ALCHEMY.EXE and 
                    REDSWAPM.EXE) reside,

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 164 of 202

        and;    b)  Specify whether or not you want to use RedSwap, to 
                    swap GUF out of memory (and onto disk), whilst 
                    running Alchemy.  You only need to do this, if 
                    Alchemy runs out of memory, whilst trying to create 
                    the shorts.
        
        Press A, to search for ALCHEMY.EXE, on the drive of your choice.
        
        And, if you want to use RedSwap, press R, to search for 
        REDSWAPM.EXE, on the drive of your choice.
        
        Press U, to toggle the use of RedSwap ON and OFF.
        
        Once you've found Alchemy and RedSwap (if required), press 
        Enter, and the following "Start Creating?" box will pop-up.
        
                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |            START CREATING            |
                    |                  4                   |
                    |             short(s) for             |
                    |             BARTCLR.GIF              |
                    |                                      |
                    |            ARE YOU SURE?             |
                    |                                      |
                    |               WARNING!               |
                    |  This is your last chance to quit.   |
                    |  If you answer Yes, we will begin.   |
                    |                                      |
                    |       +-------+       +------+       |
                    |       | Y=Yes |       | N=No |       |
                    |       +-------+       +------+       |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        The box lets you know how many shorts there are to be created; 
        in the example above, 4.
        
        Before continuing, check the number of shorts to be created.  By 
        selecting every possible option on the preceding set-up screens, 
        you can generate up to 896 shorts per source file.  These will 
        take an obscenely long time to create (hours, if not days - 
        depending on the speed, etc, of your PC).
        
        Since you only need TWO shorts per file (1 x FULL-SCREEN and 1 x 
        WINDOW), using a little brain-power to decide which settings 
        give the best results, is a lot quicker than the brute force 
        approach (of generating every conceivable alternative, and then 
        selecting the best).
        
        Press Y=Yes, if you want to create the shorts as specified.
        
        Press N=No, if you don't.
        
        If you press Y=Yes, GUF will call Alchemy, to create the 
        specified shorts.
        
        You can stop short creation at any time, by pressing Esc.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 165 of 202

        NOTE!
        -----
        
        It is GUF, NOT Alchemy that processes these Escs (that stop 
        short creation).  GUF calls Alchemy, to create each short, one 
        at a time.  So, it is not until Alchemy has finished with the 
        short it is creating, and returned control to GUF, that the Esc 
        will be processed.
        
        ================================================================
                    DELETING SHORTS FOR A SINGLE SOURCE FILE
        ================================================================
        
        To delete shorts for a single source file:-
        
                a)  Select the source file whoose short you want to 
                    delete - by pressing the number/letter key (1-Z) 
                    shown to the left of it's FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;   b)  Select the "D=DeleteShorts" option, from the "What 
                    Do You Want To Do With This SOURCE FILE?" menu that 
                    pops-up.
        
        If you do this, then the "Which Of This File's Shorts Do You 
        Want To DELETE?" box will pop-up:-
        
                       +--------------------------------+
                       |          C:\GRAPHICS\          |
                       |          BARTCLR.GIF           |
                       +--------------------------------+
                       |                                |
                       |  Which of this file's shorts   |
                       |     do you want to DELETE?     |
                       |                                |
                       |  +--------------------------+  |
                       |  |          A=All           |  |
                       |  +--------------------------+  |
                       |  +--------------------------+  |
                       |  |  B=All But The Selected  |  |
                       |  +--------------------------+  |
                       |                                |
                       |         +------------+         |
                       |         |  Esc=Quit  |         |
                       |         +------------+         |
                       +--------------------------------+
        
        You'll generally want to select option B - and delete all but 
        the selected shorts.
        
        If you select either option A or B, the "Are You Sure?" box will 
        pop-up:-

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 166 of 202

                         +---------------------------+
                         |        C:\GRAPHICS\       |
                         |        BARTCLR.GIF        |
                         +---------------------------+
                         |                           |
                         |           Delete          |
                         |            ALL            |
                         |    of this file's short   |
                         |      EXCEPT/INCLUDING     |
                         |        any selected       |
                         |  (full screen or window)  |
                         |          shorts?          |
                         |                           |
                         |       ARE YOU SURE?       |
                         |                           |
                         |          WARNING!         |
                         |     This is your last     |
                         |      chance to quit.      |
                         |                           |
                         |  +-------+      +------+  |
                         |  | Y=Yes |      | N=No |  |
                         |  +-------+      +------+  |
                         +---------------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to delete the specified shorts.
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without deleting any shorts.
        
        ================================================================
                                 VIEWING SHORTS
        ================================================================
        
        You can view the shorts, by using either:-
        
                THE MAIN MENUS "VIEW" OPTION...
                        In which case, you start viewing, with the 
                        shorts belonging to the FIRST SOURCE FILE ON THE 
                        PAGE,
        
        or;     A SELECTED SOURCE FILE'S "VIEW SHORTS" OPTION
                        In which case, you start viewing, with the 
                        SELECTED SOURCE FILE'S shorts.
        
        Thus, to view shorts, starting with the FIRST source file ON THE
        PAGE:-
        
                a)  Press F9, to call up the Main Menu
        
        then;   b)  Press V, to activate the VIEW option.
        
        To view shorts for a SELECTED source file:-
        
                a)  Select the source file whoose shorts you want to 
                    view - by pressing the number/letter key (1-Z) shown 
                    to the left of it's FILENAME.EXT,

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 167 of 202

        then;   b)  Select the "V=ViewShorts" option, from the "What Do 
                    You Want To Do With This SOURCE FILE?" menu that 
                    pops-up.
        
        Whichever source fiile you start with, the "View Shorts" 
        function works pretty much the same as the "Full Screen 
        (Shorts)" and "Full Screen (Originals)" levels.
        
        The only major difference, is the file selection keys:-
        
        On the "Full Screen" levels, they are:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    source file
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS source file
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     source file
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     source file
        
        But when VIEWING SHORTS, the file selection keys are:-
        
                [ or {  =  Go to the FIRST    short
                < or ,  =  Go to the PREVIOUS short
                > or .  =  Go to the NEXT     short
                ] or }  =  Go to the LAST     short
        
                F9      =  Go to the PREVIOUS source file
                F10     =  Go to the NEXT     source file
        
        In other words, the file selection keys now move you through the 
        shorts; and we introduce two new keys, F9 and F10, to move you 
        through the source files.
        
        See the Chapter describing the "Full Screen (Shorts)" level, for 
        more details of the "View Shorts" function.
        
        ================================================================
                              "ACTIONING" A SHORT
        ================================================================
        
        Pressing the number/letter key (1-Z), shown to the left of a 
        short's FILENAME.EXT, will cause the following box to pop-up:-
        
           +-------------------------------------------------------+
           |                      GIF00001.KRT                     |
           |        What do you want to do with this SHORT?        |
           | +----------+ +------------+ +----------+ +----------+ |
           | | S=Select | | U=UnSelect | | D=Delete | | Esc=Quit | |
           | +----------+ +------------+ +----------+ +----------+ |
           +-------------------------------------------------------+
        
        The options available, are described separately, below.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 168 of 202

        ================================================================
        		      "SELECTING" A SHORT
        ================================================================
        
        GUF supports TWO shorts per source file:-
        
        	-  The WINDOW short, which, if available, is displayed 
        	   (in place of the source file,) on the "Files (Stats & 
        	   Pictures)" level,
        
        and;	-  the FULL-SCREEN short, which, if available, is 
        	   displayed (in place of the source file,) on the "Full 
        	   Screen (Shorts)" level.
        
        However, the "Shorts" box allows you to create more than one of 
        both types of short.
        
        This allows you to experiment with the various options supported 
        by the Image Alchemy program, to see which give the best 
        results.  You can then select the best (shorts), and delete the 
        rest.
        
        However, the fact that you can have multiple (FULL-SCREEN and/or 
        WINDOW) shorts per source file, means that you need to be able 
        to select the (FULL-SCREEN and WINDOW) shorts that GUF is to 
        use.
        
        To do so:-
        
        	a)  Select the short that you want to "select" - by 
        	    pressing the number/letter key to the left of it's 
        	    FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;	b)  Press S, to select the "Select" option, from the 
        	    "What Do You Want To Do With This SHORT?" box that 
        	    pops-up.
        
        The "What Type Of Short Do You Want To Select?" box, will then 
        pop-up:-

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 169 of 202

        	 +-------------------------------------------+
        	 |		  SELECT SHORT		     |
        	 +-------------------------------------------+
        	 |					     |
        	 |	       What type of short	     |
        	 |	     do you want to select?	     |
        	 |					     |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 | | F	FULL SCREEN			   | |
        	 | |	  For display on the		   | |
        	 | |	  "Full Screen (Shorts)" level     | |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 | | W	WINDOW				   | |
        	 | |	  For display on the		   | |
        	 | |	  "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level | |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 |					     |
        	 |		    Esc=Quit		     |
        	 +-------------------------------------------+
        
        Press F or W, depending on whether you want to select the 
        FULL-SCREEN short, or the WINDOW short.
        
        The following "Are You Sure?" box, will then pop-up:-
        
        		     +--------------------+
        		     |	      Make	  |
        		     |	  C:\GRAPHICS\	  |
        		     |	  GIF00001.KRT	  |
        		     |	  the selected	  |
        		     | FULL-SCREEN/WINDOW |
        		     |	     short	  |
        		     |	      for	  |
        		     |	  C:\GRAPHICS\	  |
        		     |	  BARTCLR.GIF	  |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	 ARE YOU SURE?	  |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	    WARNING!	  |
        		     | This is your last  |
        		     |	chance to quit.   |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	Y=Yes	    N=No  |
        		     +--------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to make the selected short, the FULL-SCREEN or 
        WINDOW short for it's source file.
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without selecting the short.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 170 of 202

        ================================================================
        		     "UN-SELECTING" A SHORT
        ================================================================
        
        If a source file has a selected FULL-SCREEN or WINDOW short, and 
        you'd rather that it didn't, you can use the "UnSelect" option, 
        to remove the source file's FULL-SCREEN or WINDOW short.
        
        To do so:-
        
        	a)  Select the short that you want to "un-select" - by 
        	    pressing the number/letter key to the left of it's 
        	    FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;	b)  Press U, to select the "UnSelect" option, from the 
        	    "What Do You Want To Do With This SHORT?" box that 
        	    pops-up.
        
        The "What Type Of Short Do You Want To Un-Select?" box, will 
        then pop-up:-
        
        	 +-------------------------------------------+
        	 |		UN-SELECT SHORT 	     |
        	 +-------------------------------------------+
        	 |					     |
        	 |	       What type of short	     |
        	 |	   do you want to un-select?	     |
        	 |					     |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 | | F	FULL SCREEN			   | |
        	 | |	  For display on the		   | |
        	 | |	  "Full Screen (Shorts)" level     | |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 | | W	WINDOW				   | |
        	 | |	  For display on the		   | |
        	 | |	  "Files (Stats & Pictures)" level | |
        	 | +---------------------------------------+ |
        	 |					     |
        	 |		    Esc=Quit		     |
        	 +-------------------------------------------+
        
        Press F or W, depending on whether you want to un-select the 
        FULL-SCREEN short, or the WINDOW short.
        
        The following "Are You Sure?" box, will then pop-up:-

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 171 of 202

        		 +----------------------------+
        		 |	  C:\GRAPHICS\	      |
        		 |	  BARTCLR.GIF	      |
        		 |			      |
        		 | "Un-select" this graphic's |
        		 |     FULL-SCREEN/WINDOW     |
        		 |	     short?	      |
        		 |			      |
        		 |	 ARE YOU SURE?	      |
        		 |			      |
        		 |	    WARNING!	      |
        		 |     This is your last      |
        		 |	chance to quit.       |
        		 |			      |
        		 |     Y=Yes	     N=No     |
        		 +----------------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to remove the selected short's source file's 
        FULL-SCREEN or WINDOW short.
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without un-selecting anything.
        
        ================================================================
                               "DELETING" A SHORT
        ================================================================
        
        To delete a short:-
        
                a)  Select the short that you want to delete - by 
                    pressing the number/letter key to the left of it's 
                    FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;   b)  Press D, to select the "Delete" option, from the 
                    "What Do You Want To Do With This SHORT?" box that 
                    pops-up.
        
        The following "Are You Sure?" box, will then pop-up:-
        
        		     +--------------------+
                             |       DELETE       |
        		     |	  C:\GRAPHICS\	  |
        		     |	  GIF00001.KRT	  |
                             |                    |
                             |   ARE YOU SURE?    |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	    WARNING!	  |
        		     | This is your last  |
        		     |	chance to quit.   |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	Y=Yes	    N=No  |
        		     +--------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to delete the selected short.
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without deleting the short.

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 172 of 202

        If you press Y=Yes, and the short to be deleted is also the 
        "selected" FULL-SCREEN and/or WINDOW short, a second "Are You 
        Sure?" box, will then pop-up:-
        
                            +----------------------+
                            |     C:\GRAPHICS\     |
                            |     GIF00001.KRT     |
                            |                      |
                            |       WARNING!       |
                            | This is the selected |
                            |  FULL-SCREEN/WINDOW  |
                            |        short.        |
                            |                      |
                            |     ARE YOU SURE     |
                            |    THAT YOU WANT     |
                            |    TO DELETE IT?     |
                            |                      |
                            |   Y=Yes       N=No   |
                            +----------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to delete the selected short.
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without deleting the short.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        You can delete ALL of a source file's shorts (or, ALL except the 
        "selected" shorts), in one hit, if you want.  See the section 
        entitled "Deleting Shorts For A Single Source File", above.
        
        ================================================================
        			 THE MAIN MENU
        ================================================================
        
        Press F9, to activate the "Shorts" box's "Main Menu":-
        
                      +---------------------------------+
                      |            MAIN MENU            |
                      +---------------------------------+
                      |                                 |
                      |  B  BULK TICK/UNTICK FILES      |
                      |       Whoose shorts are         |
                      |       to be created/deleted     |
                      |                                 |
                      |  C  CREATE SHORTS               |
                      |       For the ticked (*) files  |
                      |                                 |
                      |  D  DELETE SHORTS               |
                      |       For the ticked (*) files  |
                      |                                 |
                      |  V  VIEW SHORTS                 |
                      |       Starting with the         |
                      |       first file on the page    |
                      |                                 |
                      +---------------------------------+
                      |             Esc=Quit            |
                      +---------------------------------+

        Chapter 17: "Shorts" --------------------------- Page 173 of 202

        This menu has FOUR options (though, as of GUF version 1c, only
        TWO of these are implemented):-
        
                B = BULK TICK/UNTICK FILES
                        (not yet implemented)
        
                C = CREATE SHORTS
                        Creates shorts, for all the ticked files.
        
                        NOTE!  When "Create Shorts" starts, it assumes 
                               that, as well as "ticking" the source 
                               files that you want to create shorts for, 
                               you have also edited each ticked source 
                               file's file-specific (Alchemy) options.
        
                               See the section entitled "Editing The 
                               Source File Specific Create Options" 
                               (above), for more details on this.
        
                        "Create Shorts" thus starts with the "What Type 
                        Of Shorts Do You Want To Create?" box.
        
                        Processing then continues, as described in the 
                        section entitled "Creating Shorts For A Single 
                        Source File", above.
        
                D = DELETE SHORTS
                        (not yet implemented)
        
                V = VIEW SHORTS
                        Displays shorts, starting with the first source 
                        file on the page.
        
                        See the section entitled "VIEWING SHORTS" 
                        (above), for more details.

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 174 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 18                         ##
        ##                CREATING & DELETING "LONGS"                 ##
        ################################################################
        
        Longs are created and deleted, from the "Longs" box.
        
        The "Longs" box is entered from either;
        
                the "FILES (STATS ONLY)"      level "Main Menu",
        
        or;     the "FILES (STATS & PICTURES" level "Main Menu".
        
        Press /L, from either of the above two levels, to enter the 
        "Longs" box.
        
        ================================================================
                          THE "LONGS" BOX MAIN SCREEN
        ================================================================
        
        A typical "Longs" box screen, looks like:-
        
        +-----------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                   +--------------------------+                  |
        |         +---------+  View 1 of 1 - Raw Disk  +--------+         |
        |         |  GUF - Graphic File Search Engine & Viewer  |         |
        |         +---+  Level 4 of 7 - Files (Stats Only)  +---+         |
        |             +-------------------------------------+             |
        |                                                                 |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | |                            LONGS                            | |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                                 |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | C:\GRAPHICS\                                                | |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        | | 1   SUN.GIF       640w 350h  16colours         30,000 bytes | |
        | |                                                             | |
        | | 2   MOON.JPG      Not GIF (Bad signature)      40,000 bytes | |
        | |                                                             | |
        | | 3   PLANET.JPG    Not GIF (Bad signature)      50,000 bytes | |
        | | 4   GIF00001.LNG  640w 480h 256c              200,000 bytes | |
        | |                                                             | |
        | | 5   STAR.JPG      Not GIF (Bad signature)      60,000 bytes | |
        | | 6   GIF00002.LNG  640w 480h 256c              240,000 bytes | |
        | | 7   GIF00003.LNG  640w 480h 256c (REDUNDANT)  240,000 bytes | |
        | +-------------------------------------------------------------+ |
        |                                                                 |
        +--------------------+-------------------------------+------------+
        |    Page 1 of 9     |        F5=*GraphicsMode       |  F8=*Tick  |
        |   [<>]=TurnPage    |  F6=*MenuPalettePreservation  |            |
        |     Esc=Quit       |            F7=*B&W            |  F9=Menu   |
        +--------------------+-------------------------------+------------+

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 175 of 202

        The "Longs" box lists all the "source files" that are currently 
        loaded, and, underneath each source file, the "longs" (if any,) 
        that the source file owns.
        
        In the sample screen dump above:-
        
                -  SUN.GIF is the first source file.  It's a GIF, so it 
                   doesn't need (or have) a long.
        
                   NOTE!  You CAN create longs for GIF files, but 
                          there's no point; GUF will ignore them.
        
                -  MOON.JPG is the second source file; It's a JPEG, but 
                   it has NO longs.
        
                   NOTE!  Because MOON.JPG, is NOT a GIF, and has NO 
                          long, GUF doesn't know it's Width, Height or 
                          Colours; and cannot display it.  If you want 
                          to view this source file (and/or find out it's 
                          Width, Height and Colours), you'll have to 
                          create a long for it.
        
                -  PLANET.JPG is the third source file.  It's a JPEG, 
                   and it has ONE long; GIF00001.LNG.
        
                   NOTE!  Although STAR.JPG is NOT a GIF, the fact that 
                          it has a long, means that GUF knows it Width, 
                          Height and Colours; and it can display it.
        
                -  STAR.JPG is the fourth source file.  It's a JPEG, and 
                   it has TWO longs; GIF00002.LNG and GIF00003.LNG.
        
                   NOTE!  You CAN create more than one long for each 
                          source file, but there's NO point.  GUF will 
                          IGNORE all longs, other than the first.  Such 
                          longs are marked "REDUNDANT", and may as well 
                          be DELETED.
        
        ================================================================
                              THE "LONGS" BOX KEYS
        ================================================================
        
        The keys used to operate the "Longs" box are ALL listed 
        on-screen.  (See the screen dump above.)
        
        The keys are:-
        
                1-Z = SELECT SOURCE FILE/LONG
                        (See below)
        
                F5  = TOGGLE GRAPHICS MODE
                        Toggles graphics mode ON and OFF.

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 176 of 202

                        By DEFAULT graphics mode is OFF.  In this case, 
                        one line of (text) data is listed per source 
                        file, and as many source files as possible are 
                        listed per page.  (See the screen dump above.)
        
                        When graphics mode is ON, one line of (text) 
                        data is listed per source file (the same as when 
                        graphics mode is OFF), but only ONE source file 
                        is listed per page.  This makes it possible to 
                        display the source file's graphic, in a window, 
                        immediately the source file's (text) data.
        
                F6  = TOGGLE MENU PALETTE
                        Toggles menu palette presevation OFF and ON.  
                        (Works in GRAPHICS mode only.)
        
                        When menu palette preservation is ON (which is 
                        the DEFAULT), the "menus" (ie; the stuff on 
                        screen, OTHER than the graphic), are displayed 
                        in their correct colours,  Thus, they are easy 
                        to read.
        
                        When menu palette preservation is OFF, all the 
                        colour slots supported by the video mode, are 
                        made available to the graphic.  Thus, the 
                        graphic (usually) looks better, but the "menu" 
                        colours change (randomly, to those used by the 
                        graphic).  The menus MAY become difficult, if 
                        not impossible, to read.
        
                F7  = TOGGLE BLACK AND WHITE
                        Toggles the display of the graphic in black and 
                        white ON and OFF.  (Works in GRAPHICS mode 
                        only.)
        
                        By DEFAULT, the graphics are displayed in 
                        colour.  But if black and white is ON, then the 
                        graphics will be displayed in gray-scale.  This 
                        often improves their clarity and detail.
        
                F8  = TOGGLE TICK
                        Toggles the "tick" status, of the the currently 
                        displayed source file.  (Works in GRAPHICS mode 
                        only.)
        
                F9  = MAIN MENU
                        (See below)

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 177 of 202

        ================================================================
                           "ACTIONING" A SOURCE FILE
        ================================================================
        
        Pressing the number/letter key (1-Z), shown to the left of a 
        source file's FILENAME.EXT, will cause the following box to 
        pop-up:-
        
             +---------------------------------------------------+
             |                      MOON.JPG                     |
             |   What do you want to do with this SOURCE FILE?   |
             | +----------------+ +---------------+ +----------+ |
             | | T=(Toggle)Tick | | C=CreateLongs | | Esc=Quit | |
             | +----------------+ +---------------+ +----------+ |
             +---------------------------------------------------+
        
        The options available are:-
        
                T = TOGGLE TICK
                        Toggles the file's "tick" status.
        
                        If the file is currently ticked, it will become 
                        un-ticked; if the file is currently un-ticked, 
                        it will become ticked.
        
                        NOTE!
                        -----
                        "Ticked" files are used by the Main Menu's 
                        "Create" option.  This option, creates longs for 
                        all the "ticked" files.
        
                C = CREATE LONGS
                        Allows you to create longs, for the source file.  
                        See below, for more details.
        
        ================================================================
                    CREATING LONGS FOR A SINGLE SOURCE FILE
        ================================================================
        
        To create longs for a single source file:-
        
                a)  Select the source file that you wish to create longs 
                    for - by pressing the number/letter key (1-Z) shown 
                    to the left of it's FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;   b)  Select the "C=CreateLongs" option, from the "What Do 
                    You Want To Do With This SOURCE FILE?" menu that 
                    pops-up.
        
        If you do this, then the "Get Alchemy & RedSwap Directorys" box 
        will pop-up:-

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 178 of 202

                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |             Create longs for             |
                  |                 MOON.JPG                 |
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |                                          |
                  |  ALCHEMY...                              |
                  |    -  Filename.Ext:  ALCHEMY.EXE         |
                  |    A  ...Directory:  (C:\)               |
                  |                                          |
                  |  FREE (MS-DOS Conventional) MEMORY...    |
                  |    500,000 bytes in 3 blocks             |
                  |    (largest free block = 490,000 bytes)  |
                  |                                          |
                  |  REDSWAP...                              |
                  |    -  Filename.Ext:  REDSWAPM.EXE        |
                  |    R  ...Directory:  (C:\)               |
                  |    U  ....USE? (*):  No                  |
                  |                                          |
                  |  (*) Use RedSwap, if Alchemy fails,      |
                  |      due to lack of memory.              |
                  |                                          |
                  |  Enter=Continue                Esc=Quit  |
                  +------------------------------------------+
        
        This box lets you:-
        
                a)  Search for the directory in which the Image Alchemy 
                    and RedSwap program files (ALCHEMY.EXE and 
                    REDSWAPM.EXE) reside,
        
        and;    b)  Specify whether or not you want to use RedSwap, to 
                    swap GUF out of memory (and onto disk), whilst 
                    running Alchemy.  You only need to do this, if 
                    Alchemy runs out of memory, whilst trying to create 
                    the longs.
        
        Press A, to search for ALCHEMY.EXE, on the drive of your choice.
        
        And, if you want to use RedSwap, press R, to search for 
        REDSWAPM.EXE, on the drive of your choice.
        
        Press U, to toggle the use of RedSwap ON and OFF.
        
        Once you've found Alchemy and RedSwap (if required), press 
        Enter, and the following "Start Creating?" box will pop-up.

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 179 of 202

                    +--------------------------------------+
                    |            START CREATING            |
                    |                  1                   |
                    |             long(s) for              |
                    |               MOON.JPG               |
                    |                                      |
                    |            ARE YOU SURE?             |
                    |                                      |
                    |               WARNING!               |
                    |  This is your last chance to quit.   |
                    |  If you answer Yes, we will begin.   |
                    |                                      |
                    |       +-------+       +------+       |
                    |       | Y=Yes |       | N=No |       |
                    |       +-------+       +------+       |
                    +--------------------------------------+
        
        The box lets you know how many longs there are to be created; in 
        the example above, 1.
        
        Before continuing, check the number of longs to be created.  If 
        you are creating longs for a specific source file, there will be 
        only one.  If you are creating longs for all ticked source 
        files, there will be 1 per ticked source file.
        
        Be aware that it takes about 30 seconds to create each long 
        (depending on the size and type of the source file, and the 
        speed of your PC, etc).  So, if you've ticked a lot of source 
        files, you may be in for a long wait.
        
        Press Y=Yes, if you want to create the longs.
        
        Press N=No, if you don't.
        
        If you press Y=Yes, GUF will call Alchemy, to create the longs.
        
        If you're creating longs for more than one source file, you can 
        stop long creation, by pressing Esc.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        Be aware that it is GUF, NOT Alchemy that processes these Escs 
        (that stop Long creation).  GUF calls Alchemy, to create each 
        long, one at a time.  So, it is not until Alchemy has finished 
        with the long it is creating, and returned control to GUF, that 
        the Esc will be processed.

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 180 of 202

        ================================================================
                               "ACTIONING" A LONG
        ================================================================
        
        Pressing the number/letter key (1-Z), shown to the left of a 
        long's FILENAME.EXT, will cause the following box to pop-up:-
        
                  +------------------------------------------+
                  |                GIF00001.KRT              |
                  |  What do you want to do with this LONG?  |
                  |  +----------+              +----------+  |
                  |  | D=Delete |              | Esc=Quit |  |
                  |  +----------+              +----------+  |
                  +------------------------------------------+
        
        The options available, are described separately, below.
        
        ================================================================
                               "DELETING" A LONG
        ================================================================
        
        To delete a long:-
        
                a)  Select the long that you want to delete - by 
                    pressing the number/letter key to the left of it's 
                    FILENAME.EXT,
        
        then;   b)  Press D, to select the "Delete" option, from the 
                    "What Do You Want To Do With This LONG?" box that 
                    pops-up.
        
        The following "Are You Sure?" box, will then pop-up:-
        
        		     +--------------------+
                             |       DELETE       |
        		     |	  C:\GRAPHICS\	  |
                             |    GIF00003.LNG    |
                             |                    |
                             |   ARE YOU SURE?    |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	    WARNING!	  |
        		     | This is your last  |
        		     |	chance to quit.   |
        		     |			  |
        		     |	Y=Yes	    N=No  |
        		     +--------------------+
        
        Press Y=Yes, to delete the selected long.
        
        Press N=No, to exit, without deleting the long.

        Chapter 18: Creating & Deleting "Longs" -------- Page 181 of 202

        ================================================================
        			 THE MAIN MENU
        ================================================================
        
        Press F9, to activate the "Longs" box's "Main Menu":-
        
                      +---------------------------------+
                      |            MAIN MENU            |
                      +---------------------------------+
                      |                                 |
                      |  B  BULK TICK/UNTICK FILES      |
                      |       Whoose longs are          |
                      |       to be created/deleted     |
                      |                                 |
                      |  C  CREATE LONGS                |
                      |       For the ticked (*) files  |
                      |                                 |
                      |  D  DELETE LONGS                |
                      |       For the ticked (*) files  |
                      |                                 |
                      +---------------------------------+
                      |             Esc=Quit            |
                      +---------------------------------+
        
        This menu has THREE options (though, as of GUF version 1c, only
        ONE of these is implemented):-
        
                B = BULK TICK/UNTICK FILES
                        (not yet implemented)
        
                C = CREATE LONGS
                        Creates longs, for all the ticked files.
        
                        When "Create Longs" starts, it assumes that you 
                        have already "ticked" the source files, that you 
                        want to create longs for.
        
                        Processing then continues, with the "Get Alchemy 
                        & RedSwap Directorys" box - as described in the 
                        section entitled "Creating Longs For A Single 
                        Source File", above.
        
                D = DELETE LONGS
                        (not yet implemented)

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 182 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Chapter 19                         ##
        ##                  SHAREWARE & REGISTRATION                  ##
        ################################################################
        
        ================================================================
                                  INTRODUCTION
        ================================================================
        
        ****************************************************************
             ***         GUF (Version 1c) IS SHAREWARE          ***
          *********          AND MUST BE REGISTERED          *********
          *********            ($ NZ 99 per copy)            *********
             ***           IF YOU CONTINUE TO USE IT            ***
        ****************************************************************
        
        This version of GUF (version 1c), is distributed as SHAREWARE.
        
        You may evaluate it for free (max. 30 days), but if you continue
        to use it, you MUST REGISTER it, by sending:-
        
                $ NZ 99 (PER COPY)
        
        to:-
        
                Red Flower Computers
                P.O. Box 2304
                Wellington
                NEW ZEALAND.
        
        NOTE!  You MAY not need to register this version of GUF, if 
               you've already registered an acceptable subsequent 
               version.  See the UPGRADES policy, for the version you've 
               registered.
        
        ================================================================
                             PERSONAL REGISTRATION
        ================================================================
        
        PERSONAL registration costs $ NZ 99.
        
        Once you've registered your copy, you may install and run it on 
        as many different machines as you like, so long as it is you, 
        and only you, who uses those copies.
        
        The exception to this, is IMMEDIATE FAMILY MEMBERS (*), that are 
        LIVING WITH YOU.
        
        They may also use your registered copy.

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 183 of 202

        (*)  IMMEDIATE FAMILY MEMBERS ARE:-
                   -  Your spouse/partner
                   -  You and/or your spouse/partner's children,
                      grand-children, great-grand-children, etc,
             and;  -  You and/or your spouse/partner's parents,
                      grand-parents, great-grand-parents, etc.
        
        ================================================================
                             CORPORATE REGISTRATION
        ================================================================
        
        GUF can also be registered to a business or organisation.
        
        The rule is; the corporation MUST register one copy of GUF, for 
        each employee that uses GUF in the course of their employment.
        
        For example, if the corporation employs 100 people, of which 5 
        use GUF in the course of their employment, then the corporation 
        must register 5 copies of GUF.
        
        The corporation must also REVIEW the number of people that use 
        GUF in the course of their employment, on a YEARLY basis.  If 
        the number of people that use GUF in the course of their 
        employment INCREASES (*), then the corporation must register the 
        appropriate number of ADDITIONAL copies.
        
        For example, consider a corporation that INITIALLY registered 5 
        copies of GUF.  If, when performing the first YEARLY review, the 
        corporation found that there were now 20 employees using GUF (in 
        the course of their employment), the corporation must register 
        an additional 15 copies (of GUF).
        
        Corporate registration costs $ NZ 99 PER COPY.
        
        (*)  Sorry, but if the number of employees that use GUF in the 
             course of their employment DECREASES, the corporation does 
             NOT get a refund.
        
        ================================================================
                            NO "REGISTERED" VERSION
        ================================================================
        
        The Shareware version is complete and fully-functional.  It is 
        NOT crippled in any way.
        
        Further, there is NO `registered' version; nor is their a 
        `commercial' or any other version.
        
        This means that, when you register GUF, you will NOT receive 
        anything back (through the mail) from us.  There is NO 
        registered version, nor any printed User Manual, to send you.  
        YOU ALREADY HAVE THE COMPLETE PACKAGE.

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 184 of 202

        ================================================================
                                PAYMENT METHODS
        ================================================================
        
        You can pay, by any of the following methods:-
        
                -  Personal Cheque
                -  Business Cheque
                -  Bank Cheque
                -  Bank Draft
        
        Cheques MUST be made out to:
        
                RED FLOWER COMPUTERS
        
        We would prefer cheques expressed in NEW ZEALAND currency:-
        
                NINETY-NINE NEW ZEALAND DOLLARS (PER COPY)
        
        However, you CAN make the cheque out in your local currency 
        (converted at the current exchange rate - between your local 
        currency and NEW ZEALAND DOLLARS), if you want to.
        
        ================================================================
                           PERSONAL REGISTRATION FORM
        ================================================================
        
        To obtain PERSONAL registration for GUF, please print out this 
        registration form, and fill it in.  Send the original to us 
        (WITH YOUR PAYMENT), and keep a copy for your records.
        
        NOTE!  We need the filled-in registration form from you, so that 
               we know who the registered copy belongs to.

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 185 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                        GUF Version 1c                        |
        |                  PERSONAL REGISTRATION FORM                  |
        |                         Page 1 of 2                          |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  Red Flower Computers                                        |
        |  P.O. Box 2304,                                              |
        |  Wellington,                                                 |
        |  NEW ZEALAND.                                                |
        |                                                              |
        |  Please REGISTER my copy of:-                                |
        |       GUF Version 1c                                         |
        |                                                              |
        |  Payment, of NINETY-NINE NEW ZEALAND DOLLARS (or the         |
        |  equivalent in local currency), made out to RED FLOWER       |
        |  COMPUTERS, is enclosed.                                     |
        |                                                              |
        |  The registered copy BELONGS to:-                            |
        |                                                              |
        |      FULL NAME:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |    RESIDENTIAL:  __________________________________________  |
        |             OR:  __________________________________________  |
        |         STREET:  __________________________________________  |
        |        ADDRESS:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |        MAILING:  __________________________________________  |
        |        ADDRESS:  __________________________________________  |
        |                  __________________________________________  |
        |                  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |  EMAIL ADDRESS:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |     FAX NUMBER:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |           DATE:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |      SIGNATURE:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  The following information is NOT essential.  But it will    |
        |  help us to plan the future development of GUF, if we know   |
        |  the HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PLATFORMS that YOU want us to     |
        |  support...                                                  |
        |                                                              |
        |   CPU LEVEL:	__8086	__286  __386  __486  __586/Pentium     |
        |                                                              |
        |   OPERATING:	__MS-DOS  version ___________________________  |
        |      SYSTEM:	__Windows version ___________________________  |
        |               __Other (please specify) ____________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |  VIDEO CARD:	__VGA  __SVGA				       |
        |  Make/Model:  _____________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 186 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                        GUF Version 1c                        |
        |                  PERSONAL REGISTRATION FORM                  |
        |                         Page 2 of 2                          |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  The following information is also NOT essential.  But it    |
        |  will help us to determine the best ways to provide SUPPORT  |
        |  and PRODUCT UPGRADES to YOU...                              |
        |                                                              |
        |  Do you have an INTERNET CONNECTION?.......:  Yes___  No___  |
        |                                                              |
        |  Do you use BULLETIN BOARDS (or other                        |
        |  ON-LINE SERVICES, like CompuServe)?.......:  Yes___  No___  |
        |                                                              |
        |  If YES, which ones:-                                        |
        |               NAME/LOCATION               DATA PHONE NUMBER  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  Are there any IMPROVEMENTS you would like made to GUF?...   |
        |                                                              |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |  Once you've filled in this registration form, please MAIL   |
        |  it, TOGETHER WITH YOUR PAYMENT, to:-                        |
        |                                                              |
        |       Red Flower Computers                                   |
        |       P.O. Box 2304,                                         |
        |       Wellington,                                            |
        |       NEW ZEALAND.                                           |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 187 of 202

        ================================================================
                          CORPORATE REGISTRATION FORM
        ================================================================
        
        To obtain CORPORATE registration for GUF, please print out this 
        registration form, and fill it in.  Send the original to us 
        (WITH YOUR PAYMENT), and keep a copy for your records.
        
        NOTE!  We need the filled-in registration form from you, so that 
               we know who the registered copies belong to.

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 188 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                        GUF Version 1c                        |
        |                 CORPORATE REGISTRATION FORM                  |
        |                         Page 1 of 3                          |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  Red Flower Computers                                        |
        |  P.O. Box 2304,                                              |
        |  Wellington,                                                 |
        |  NEW ZEALAND.                                                |
        |                                                              |
        |  Please REGISTER ____________ copies of:-                    |
        |                                                              |
        |       GUF Version 1c                                         |
        |                                                              |
        |  THIS IS AN INITIAL REGISTRATION.                            |
        |  We have NOT yet registered any other copies of GUF.         |
        |  ___ (Tick if applicable.)                                   |
        |                                                              |
        |  THIS IS A YEARLY REGISTRATION UPDATE.                       |
        |  We have already registered ________________ copies of GUF.  |
        |  We are now registering ________________ additional copies.  |
        |  So we now have _________________ registered copies of GUF.  |
        |  ___ (Tick, and complete the above, if applicable.)          |
        |                                                              |
        |  Payment, of ____________________________________(AMOUNT)    |
        |              ____________________________________(CURRENCY)  |
        |  (being NINETY-NINE NEW ZEALAND DOLLARS PER COPY, or the     |
        |  equivalent in local currency), made out to RED FLOWER       |
        |  COMPUTERS, is enclosed.                                     |
        |                                                              |
        |  The registered copies BELONG to:-                           |
        |                                                              |
        |      FULL NAME:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |     ADDRESS OF:  __________________________________________  |
        |     REGISTERED:  __________________________________________  |
        |        OR HEAD:  __________________________________________  |
        |         OFFICE:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |           DATE:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |      SIGNATURE:  __________________________________________  |
        |       POSITION:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  The CONTACT PERSON, within this organisation, to whom Red   |
        |  Flower Computers should address any correspondence, is...   |
        |                                                              |
        |   CONTACT NAME:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |        MAILING:  __________________________________________  |
        |        ADDRESS:  __________________________________________  |
        |                  __________________________________________  |
        |                  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 189 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                        GUF Version 1c                        |
        |                 CORPORATE REGISTRATION FORM                  |
        |                         Page 2 of 3                          |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  CONTACT PERSON details continued...                         |
        |                                                              |
        |  EMAIL ADDRESS:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |     FAX NUMBER:  __________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  The following information is NOT essential.  But it will    |
        |  help us to plan the future development of GUF, if we know   |
        |  the HARDWARE AND SOFTWARE PLATFORMS that YOU want us to     |
        |  support...                                                  |
        |                                                              |
        |   CPU LEVEL:	__8086	__286  __386  __486  __586/Pentium     |
        |                                                              |
        |   OPERATING:	__MS-DOS  version ___________________________  |
        |      SYSTEM:	__Windows version ___________________________  |
        |               __Other (please specify) ____________________  |
        |                                                              |
        |  VIDEO CARD:	__VGA  __SVGA				       |
        |  Make/Model:  _____________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  The following information is also NOT essential.  But it    |
        |  will help us to determine the best ways to provide SUPPORT  |
        |  and PRODUCT UPGRADES to YOU...                              |
        |                                                              |
        |  Do you have an INTERNET CONNECTION?.......:  Yes___  No___  |
        |                                                              |
        |  Do you use BULLETIN BOARDS (or other                        |
        |  ON-LINE SERVICES, like CompuServe)?.......:  Yes___  No___  |
        |                                                              |
        |  If YES, which ones:-                                        |
        |               NAME/LOCATION               DATA PHONE NUMBER  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |  _______________________________________  _________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+

        Chapter 19: Shareware & Registration ----------- Page 190 of 202

        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                        GUF Version 1c                        |
        |                 CORPORATE REGISTRATION FORM                  |
        |                         Page 3 of 3                          |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |                                                              |
        |  Are there any IMPROVEMENTS you would like made to GUF?...   |
        |                                                              |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |  __________________________________________________________  |
        |                                                              |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+
        |  Once you've filled in this registration form, please MAIL   |
        |  it, TOGETHER WITH YOUR PAYMENT, to:-                        |
        |                                                              |
        |       Red Flower Computers                                   |
        |       P.O. Box 2304,                                         |
        |       Wellington,                                            |
        |       NEW ZEALAND.                                           |
        +--------------------------------------------------------------+

        Appendix 1: Versions --------------------------- Page 191 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Appendix 1                         ##
        ##                          VERSIONS                          ##
        ################################################################
        
        ================================================================
                                   VERSION 1A
        ================================================================
        
        Version 1a is the original and first version of GUF.  It was 
        released on 10 June 1998.
        
        ================================================================
                                   VERSION 1B
        ================================================================
        
        Version 1b is the second version of GUF.  It was released on 10 
        July 1998.
        
        ================================================================
                                   VERSION 1C
        ================================================================
        
        Version 1c is the second and latest (as far as this User Manual
        is concerned) version of GUF.  It was released on 16 July 1998.
        
        See Appendix 3, for a description of the differences between
        this latest version (1c), and the previous version (1b).

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 192 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Appendix 2                         ##
        ##                 NEW FEATURES OF VERSION 1B                 ##
        ################################################################
        
        Version 1b is a interim upgrade of version 1a.  It was released 
        to fix some problems with directory searching, that occurred 
        under Windows 95.
        
        The problems were:-
        
                1.  DIRECTORY AND FILE NAMES LONGER THAN 80 CHARACTERS
        
                2.  NON DOS-ACCESSIBLE (WINDOWS ONLY) DIRECTORYS
        
        These problems, and the solutions incorporated in version 1b, 
        are described in more detail below.
        
        Version 1b was supposed to have some OTHER IMPROVEMENTS
        (compared to version 1a), but, at the time of release, only some 
        of these had been completed.
        
        However, the need to fix up the Windows 95 directory searching 
        problems, meant that we released version 1b in this state.  The 
        remaining improvements will be included in version 1d.
        
        The improvements included in version 1b are:-
        
                3.  NEW "WANTED FILE" CATEGORYS
        
                4.  MULTIPLE "WANTED FILES" CATEGORYS CAN BE SELECTED
        
                5.  NEW "WHAT DO YOU WANT TO DO WITH THIS DIRECTORY?"
                    MENU
        
                6.  NEW "WHAT DO YOU WANT TO DO WITH THIS FILE?" MENU
        
                7.  NEW CONVERT OPTION
        
        The above listed improvements are described in more detail
        below.
        
        Version 1b also includes some other minor bug-fixes and 
        improvements (compared to version 1a), but they're too minor to 
        list and describe explicitly.

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 193 of 202

        ================================================================
               DIRECTORY AND FILE NAMES LONGER THAN 80 CHARACTERS
        ================================================================
        
        MS-DOS supports directory and files up to a maximum length of 80 
        characters.
        
        More specifically, an MS-DOS directory or file name is of the 
        form:-
        
                d:\DIR1\DIR2\...\DIRn\                  (directory)
        and;    d:\DIR1\DIR2\...\DIRn\FILENAME.EXT      (file)
        
        and will never be longer than 80 characters.
        
        GUF version 1a, being an MS-DOS program, was dimensioned for 
        80-character max. directory and file names.  But, Windows 95 
        supports directory and file names longer than this.  When GUF 
        version 1a encounters these things (while searching for graphic 
        files, for example), it will issue a "Path not found" error 
        message, and abort, straight back to the MS-DOS prompt.
        
        This is pretty inconvenient.  So, I've modified GUF to IGNORE 
        any directory or file that has a name longer than 80 characters.
        
        NOTE!  It would have been better to modify GUF so that it would 
               handle the new Windows 95 length directory and file 
               names.  But, I don't have any Windows 95 technical 
               documentation, I don't know what the Windows 95 maximum 
               lengths are.
        
        THe GUF version 1b solution, is therefore an interim one.  
        
        However, GUF version 1b will no longer crash when it encounters 
        directory or files with names longer than 80 characters.  It'll 
        just ignore them.
        
        Fortunately, directorys and files with names of this length are 
        not that common.
        
        ================================================================
                  NON DOS-ACCESSIBLE (WINDOWS ONLY) DIRECTORYS
        ================================================================
        
        Windows 95 also supports directorys that cannot be accessed from 
        MS-DOS.
        
        For example, "Total PC" magazine, issue 14, has a CD-ROM with a 
        directory called \PATCHES\.  \PATCHES\ in turn, has a 
        sub-directory called CLOSEC~9\.  When inspected from the DOS box 
        (using the DIR command), you see:-

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 194 of 202

                M:\PATCHES> DIR C*.*
                CART            <DIR>   20-03-98
                CLOSEC~9        <DIR>   20-03-98
                CLOSEC2         <DIR>   20-03-98
        
        Now, you'd imagine that you could nest down to CLOSEC~9\, with 
        the CD command.  But if you try it, you get:-
        
                M:\PATCHES> CD CLOSEC~9
                Invalid directory
        
        When GUF version 1a scans this CD-ROM, using the MS-DOS "Find 
        First/Next File" functions, those functions first tell GUF that 
        there is a sub-directory, in \PATCHES\, called CLOSEC~9\.  But 
        when GUF trys to scan \PATCHES\CLOSEC~9\ (for graphic files), 
        using those same functions, they then tell it that 
        \PATCHES\CLOSEC~9\ does not exist (by returning a "Path not 
        found" error).
        
        GUF version 1a therefore (and correctly; see the NOTE below) 
        concludes that there is something seriously wrong, issues a 
        "Path not found", and aborts, back to the MS-DOS prompt.
        
        This is inconvenient.  So, I've modified GUF to IGNORE any 
        directory located during a directory search, which generates a 
        "Path not found" error when GUF try to access it.
        
        Fortunately, directorys that do this seem to be fairly rare.  
        However, with this patch, you'll at least be able to search 
        disks that contain them, and locate all the graphic files that 
        live in normal, DOS-accessible directorys.
        
        NOTE!
        -----
        
        GUF version 1a is correct in concluding that something is 
        seriously wrong, because it has encountered a situation where 
        the MS-DOS "Find First/Next File" functions tell it that 
        \PATCHES\CLOSEC~9\; A) DOES, and; B) DOES NOT, exist.
        
        Obviously, you can't have it both ways.  So, something must be 
        (seriously) wrong.  Maybe the disk is trashed; maybe the disk 
        controller is stuffed; maybe the MS-DOS memory image (programs 
        and/or data) have been corrupted.
        
        In fact, it's none of these things.  It's the logic of the "Find 
        First/Next File" functions (under Windows 95,) that's at fault.

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 195 of 202

        ================================================================
                          NEW "WANTED FILES" CATEGORYS
        ================================================================
        
        GUF version 1b supports FIFTEEN "wanted file" categorys (as 
        opposed to the EIGHT supported by GUF version 1a).
        
        The GUF version 1b categorys are:-
        
        	1.   GIFs
                        *.GIF
        
        	2.   COMMON NON-GIFs
                        *.BMP  *.ICO  *.JPG  *.PCX  *.PIC  *.TIF
        
        	3.   HSI GRAPHICS
                        *.BIF  *.HSI  *.PAL  *.RAW
        
        	4.   UNCOMMON NON-GIFs
                        *.A    *.CLR  *.GM   *.IFF  *.PAL  *.Q0   *.TAB
                        *.ART  *.CM   *.GM2  *.IM   *.PBM  *.RAS  *.VI
                        *.ASC  *.CRF  *.GM4  *.IMG  *.PCL  *.RGB  *.VIT
                        *.A8   *.CUT  *.GOE  *.IMQ  *.PDF  *.RIX  *.WPG
                        *.BIF  *.DCX  *.GRB  *.IM1  *.PGM  *.RLE  *.XBM
                        *.BIL  *.EPI  *.G8   *.IM8  *.PM   *.RTL  *.XPM
                        *.BM   *.EPS  *.HDR  *.LAN  *.PNM  *.R8   *.XWD
                        *.B8   *.ERS  *.HRF  *.LBM  *.PPM  *.SCD
                        *.CAL  *.FAL  *.IBG  *.MAC  *.PRE  *.SCX
                        *.CEL  *.FOP  *.IDC  *.MTV  *.PZL  *.SGI
                        *.CLP  *.GIS  *.IDX  *.P    *.QDV  *.SST
        
        	5.   UNLIKELY NON-GIFs
                        *.DAT  *.PRN
        
        	6.   GUF SUPPORT FILES
                        SCNSHRTS.RFC  WDWSHRTS.RFC
        
        	7.   SHORTS
                        GIF?????.KRT
        
                8.   LONGS
                        GIF?????.LNG
        
                9.   ALL FILES
                        *.*
        
                10.  BATCH FILES
                        *.BAT
        
                11.  PROGRAM FILES
                        *.COM  *.EXE

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 196 of 202

                12.  TEXT FILES
                        *.TXT  *.PRT  README.1ST  ORDER.FRM
                        *.DOC  *.MAN  READ.ME     FILE_ID.DIZ
                        *.PRN  *.HLP  READ.ME2    VENDINFO.DIZ
                                      README
        
                13.  ARCHIVE FILES
                        *.ZIP  *.LST  *.PAK  *.ARJ  *.LHA
        
                14.  PROGRAM SUPPORT FILES
                        *.OVL  *.BIN  *.DLL  *.SYS
        
        	15.  SOFTWARE DEVELOPMENT FILES
                        *.ASM  *.BAS  *.LST  *.MAP  *.SYM
        
        ================================================================
               MULTIPLE "WANTED FILES" CATEGORYS CAN BE SELECTED
        ================================================================
        
        With GUF version 1a, you could only select (and search for) only 
        ONE "wanted files" category at a time.
        
        With GUF version 1b, you can select (and search for) ANY NUMBER 
        of "wanted file" categorys.
        
        ================================================================
             NEW "WHAT DO YOU WANT TO DO WITH THIS DIRECTORY" MENU
        ================================================================
        
        The "What Do You Want To Do With This Directory?" menu (that 
        pops-up when you select a DIRECTORY), has been (partially) 
        re-designed.  It has some additional options.  And it has a 
        multi-page format, that allows for a short description of each 
        option.  Ie:-
        
        	     +------------------------------------+
        	     |	  What do you want to do with	  |
        	     |		    d:\DIR\		  |
        	     |					  |
        	     |	   1 = VIEW/List (It's Files)     |
        	     |	   2 = LOAD (It's Files) Only     |
        	     |					  |
        	     |	  3 = MAKE It A GUF Directory	  |
        	     |	 4 = UN-MAKE It A GUF Directory   |
        	     |	5 = CREATE A GUF Sub-Dir For It   |
        	     |					  |
        	     |	    6 = COPY Ticked Files To	  |
        	     |	    7 = MOVE Ticked Files To	  |
        	     |	  8 = DELETE Ticked Files From	  |
        	     |					  |
        	     |	9 = Edit DIRECTORY Title/Comment  |
        	     |	A = Edit DOCUMENT Title/Comment   |
        	     |					  |
        	     |		  Page 1 of 3		  |
        	     |	  <=Previous  >=Next  Esc=Quit	  |
        	     +------------------------------------+

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 197 of 202

        Although this menu lists a number of new options (in addition to 
        the VIEW and LOAD options supported by GUF version 1a), NONE of 
        these new options have been implemented.
        
        Hopefully, however, most (if not all) of these new options, will 
        be implemented by GUF version 1d.
        
        ================================================================
               NEW "WHAT DO YOU WANT TO DO WITH THIS FILE?" MENU
        ================================================================
        
        The "What Do You Want To Do With This File?" menu (that pops-up 
        when you select a FILE), has been re-designed.  It now has a 
        multi-page format, that allows for a short description of each 
        option.  Ie:-
        
                    +-------------------------------------+
                    |     What do you want to do with     |
                    |         d:\DIR\FILENAME.EXT         |
                    |                                     |
                    |  V=View     R=Rename     N=Convert  |
                    |   T=Tag     P=Copy       S=Scale    |
                    |             D=Delete     W=WorkOn   |
                    |                                     |
                    |      EF=Edit FILE Title/Comment     |
                    |    EP=Edit PICTURE Title/Comment    |
                    |                                     |
                    |             Page 1 of 9             |
                    |     <=Previous  >=Next  Esc=Quit    |
                    +-------------------------------------+
        
        The menu still lists much the same options as it did in version 
        1a; but most of these are still NOT implemented.
        
        However the CONVERT option HAS been implemented.  It allows you 
        to convert a file, to another graphic file format (as described 
        in more detail below).
        
        Hopefully, by version 1d, the remaining options (in
        particular:-
        
                -  TAG
                -  RENAME
                -  COPY
                -  DELETE
                -  EDIT FILE TITLE/COMMENT
        and;    -  EDIT PICTURE TITLE/COMMENT)
        
        will also have been implemented.
        
        Once that has been done, you will be able to:-
                a)  RENAME, COPY and DELETE files,
        and;    b)  Attach TITLES (of up to 64 characters) and/or 
                    COMMENTS (of up to 64 kBytes), to each file and 
                    graphic.

        Appendix 2: New Features of Version 1B --------- Page 198 of 202

        ================================================================
                               NEW CONVERT OPTION
        ================================================================
        
        The CONVERT option - on the "What Do You Want To Do With This 
        FILE?" menu (the menu that pops-up when you select a FILE) - has 
        been implemented.
        
        This option allows you to convert the selected file, to any of 
        the following common graphic file formats:-
        
                *.BMP
                *.GIF
                *.ICO
                *.JPG
                *.PCX
                *.TIF

        Appendix 3: Version 1C ------------------------- Page 199 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Appendix 3                         ##
        ##                 NEW FEATURES OF VERSION 1C                 ##
        ################################################################
        
        GUF Version 1c, is a minor upgrade (mainly to the 
        documentation,) of GUF Version 1b.  The changes are:-
        
                TO THE DOCUMENTION
                ------------------
                        NEW README.TXT FILE
                                A README.TXT file has been added.
        
                        USER MANUAL
                                This User Manual has been updated, as 
                                described below.
        
                TO THE PROGRAM
                --------------
                        TREE MODE AT START-UP
                                See below.
        
                        THE REGISTATION DETAILS SCREEN
                                Re-worded, slightly.
                                NOTE!  The registration screen, is the 
                                screen that appears when you exit GUF.
        
        ================================================================
                             TREE MODE AT START-UP
        ================================================================
        
        With GUF versions 1a and 1b, if the root directory at start-up 
        was a drive root directory, then tree mode defaulted ON.  
        Otherwise, tree mode defaulted OFF.
        
        With GUF version 1c, tree mode ALWAYS defaults OFF, at start-up.
        
        This change eliminates the long wait, at start-up, that occurred 
        if you started GUF:-
                -  In a drive root directory,
                -  On a large drive,
        and;    -  On a slow PC (or in MS-DOS mode, under Windows 95).

        Appendix 3: Version 1C ------------------------- Page 200 of 202

        ================================================================
                         THE GUF VERSION 1C USER MANUAL
        ================================================================
        
        This is the GUF version 1c User Manual.
        
        However, apart from the Appendices, it is identical to the GUF 
        versions 1a and 1b User Manuals.
        
        In other words, the bulk of this User Manual - Chapters 1 to 19 
        inclusive - has NOT been updated to reflect the new features 
        either of versions 1b or 1c (*).
        
        Those new features have been described in this, and the 
        preceding, Appendix.
        
        We'll update the User Manual proper, to reflect them, when GUF 
        version 1d is released.
        
        (*)  The exception to this, is that all references to GUF 
             version 1a or 1b, in Chapters 1 to 19 inclusive, have been 
             changed to GUF version 1c.
        
        ================================================================
                    FREE UPGRADE FROM/TO VERSIONS 1A AND 1B
        ================================================================
        
        If you've already registered GUF version 1a, or GUF version 1b, 
        then that registration covers GUF version 1c too.
        
        In other words, if you've registered either of GUF version 1a, 
        or GUF version 1b, then you can obtain a copy of GUF version 1c, 
        and use it, after it's (30 day max.) evaluation period, without 
        any further payment.
        
        This also works in reverse.  If you register GUF version 1c, 
        then that registration covers GUF versions 1a and 1b also.
        
        In other words, no matter which version of GUF you register 
        (version 1a or version 1b or version 1c) - once you've 
        registered one of those versions, you can then keep and use any 
        or all of them, after the expiry of their (30 day max.) 
        evaluation periods, without any further payment.
        
                                     NOTE!
                                     -----
        All three versions (1a to 1c, inclusive,) cost the same to
        register; $NZ 99.00.  (That's about $US 50.00; depending on the 
        exchange rate.)

        Appendix 4: How To Contact Us ------------------ Page 201 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Appendix 4                         ##
        ##                     HOW TO CONTACT US                      ##
        ################################################################
        
        MAIL:           Red Flower Computers
                        P.O. Box 2304
                        Wellington
                        NEW ZEALAND
        
        EMAIL:          PeterNewman@xtra.co.nz

        Appendix 5: Acknowledgements ------------------- Page 202 of 202

        ################################################################
        ##                         Appendix 5                         ##
        ##                      ACKNOWLEDGEMENTS                      ##
        ################################################################
        
        "The Graphics Interchange Format(c) is the Copyright property of
        CompuServe Incorporated. GIF(sm) is a Service Mark property of
        CompuServe Incorporated."
